Oms 1000 K Operator Guide

Scalar 1000 Library
Operator Guide
Copyright Notice
20022004 ADIC
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are
reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another
language without prior written consent of ADIC.
ADIC shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages
(including lost profits) in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material
whether based on warranty, contract, or other legal theory.
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright Notice (Europe)

20022004 ADIC Europe
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any
means, without prior written permission of ADIC Europe, ZAC des Basses Auges, 1,rue Alfred de
Vigny, 78112 - Fourqueux, France.
ADIC Europe assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document, and
retains the right to make changes to these specifications and descriptions at any time, without
notice.
This publication may describe designs for which patents are pending, or have been granted. By
publishing this information, ADIC Europe conveys no license under any patent or any other right.
ADIC Europe makes no representation or warranty with respect to the contents of this document
and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular
purpose. Further, ADIC Europe reserves the right to revise or change this publication without
obligation on the part of ADIC Europe to notify any person or organization of such revision of
change.
Every effort has been made to acknowledge trademarks and their owners. Trademarked names are
used solely for identification or exemplary purposes, any omission is unintentional.
ADIC is a registered trademark and ADIC Europe is a trademark of Advanced Digital Information
Corporation.
ADIC USA
Tel.: +1-303-705-3900
Fax: +1-303-792-2465
ATAC: 1-800-827-3822
www.adic.com
ADIC Europe
ZAC des Basses Auges
1, rue Alfred de Vigny
78112 Fourqueux, France
Tel.: +33.1.3087.5300
Fax: +33.1.3087.5301
Document number: 6-00054-02 Rev A

Published: 22 June 2004
ADIC Germany Beteiligungs GmbH, KG

Eschenstrae 3
D-89558
Bhmenkirch, Germany
Tel: +00.800.9999.3822
Printed in the USA
ADIC CORPORATE 11431 WILLOWS ROAD, NE REDMOND, WASHINGTON, USA 1-800-336-1233

ADIC 8560 UPLAND DRIVE ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO, USA 1-800-827-3822
ADIC 10 BROWN ROAD ITHACA, NEW YORK, USA 1-607-241-4800
Contents
1
About this Guide
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Associated Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Explanation of Symbols and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
ADIC Technical Assistance Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Regulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Federal Communication Commission Class A Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
IC Notice (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
CE Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
VCCI Notices (Japan Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
iii
2
System Description
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Internal Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cartridge Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Cartridge Accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
SAN Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
SCSI Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Scalar DLC Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
3
Safety
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Hazard Alert Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Area of Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Library Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Mechanical Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Main Circuit Breaker (Power) Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
iv
Contents
6-00054-02 Rev A
4
Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Starting the Scalar 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Shutting Down the Scalar 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Normal Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Emergency Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Restarting the Scalar 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Using the Remote Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Supported Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
System Administrator Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
RMU Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Setting up the RMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Accessing the RMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Logging into the RMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Checking Status and General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Configuring Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Configuring SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Downloading the SNMP MIB File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Configuring RMU Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Adding/Removing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Changing a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Configuring the Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Synchronizing with an NTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Updating Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Viewing Diagnostic Files (Library and RMU Logs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Using the Operator Panel (via the RMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Viewing Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
22 June 2004
Contents
5
Menus and Commands
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Using the Operator Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Accessing the Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Special Characters or Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Help Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Operator Intervention Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Mode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Mode Parms Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Element Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Mixed-Media Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Reservations Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
System Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Element Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Logs Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Command Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Drive Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Drive State Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Media Info Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Commands Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Move Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Position to Elem Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Move Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Inventory Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Insert/Eject Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Insert Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Insert Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Eject Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Eject Clean Tape Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Expired Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
vi
Contents
6-00054-02 Rev A
By Coordinate Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

By Volser Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Database Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Element Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Config Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Learn Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Manipulate Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Manipulate Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Target ID Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Parity Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Ports Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Host Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Trace Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Security Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Switching Security From Off to On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Switching Security From On to Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Changing the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Emulate Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
RMU Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Name Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
IP Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Cleaning Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
View Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Utils Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Screen Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Audio Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Time Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Date Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Update Microcode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Clean Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Unload Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Initialize Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
SCSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
22 June 2004
Contents
vii
Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113

Start Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Diags Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
DI/DO Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
Loopback Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
Sensors Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Wrap Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
Locks Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Gripper Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Get/Put Storage Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
Get/Put Drives Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
Step Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Scanner Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Adjust Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Trigger Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Fiducial Test Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Accessor Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Move Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
Step Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
SelfTest Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
PowerSup Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
Teach Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Teach New Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Teach Current Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
SAC Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Demo Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Other Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
About Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
6
Processing Media
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tape Cartridge Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Inspecting Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Handling Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Storing Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Acclimating Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Transporting Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Inserting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
viii
Contents
6-00054-02 Rev A
Using the Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Manually Inserting Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Ejecting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Manually Removing Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Understanding Barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Barcode Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Applying Barcode Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Barcode Label Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Cleaning Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Manual Clean without Library Cleaning Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Manual Clean with Library Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Immediate AutoClean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Library Delayed AutoClean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Host Controlled Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Enabling Library AutoClean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Using Cleaning Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Inserting a Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Ejecting a Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Declaring a Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Viewing Cleaning Cartridge Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
7
Error Messages
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Service Action Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Operator Intervention Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Error Log Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Index
22 June 2004
Contents
ix
Contents
6-00054-02 Rev A
Figures
Figure 2-1
Control Module and Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-2
Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-3
Cartridge Accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-4
Indirect Fibre Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Figure 2-5
Direct SCSI Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-6
Network Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Figure 4-1
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-2
Main Circuit Breaker Switch Locations (Back View of CM/EM). . . 4-7
Figure 4-3
Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Figure 4-4
Reboot Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Figure 5-1
Operator Panel Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5-2
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Figure 5-3
Mode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5-4
Ready Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5-5
Not Ready Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5-6
Shutdown Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Figure 5-7
Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Figure 5-8
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Figure 5-9
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Figure 5-10
Mode Parms Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Figure 5-11
Element Address Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Figure 5-12
Mixed-Media Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
xi
xii
Figures
Figure 5-13
Parity Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Figure 5-14
LCD Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Figure 5-15
Reservation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Figure 5-16
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Figure 5-17
System Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Figure 5-18
Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Figure 5-19
Figure 5-20
Element Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Figure 5-21
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Figure 5-22
Figure 5-23
Figure 5-24
Logs Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Figure 5-25
Command Log Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Figure 5-26
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Figure 5-27
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Figure 5-28
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Figure 5-29
Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Figure 5-30
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Figure 5-31
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Figure 5-32
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Figure 5-33
Drive Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Figure 5-34
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Figure 5-35
Drive State Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Figure 5-36
Figure 5-37
Element Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Figure 5-38
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Figure 5-39
Commands Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Figure 5-40
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Figure 5-41
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Figure 5-42
Move Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Figure 5-43
Position to Elem Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Figure 5-44
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Figure 5-45
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
6-01151-01 Rev A
22 June 2004
Figure 5-46
Move Media Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Figure 5-47
Target Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Figure 5-48
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Figure 5-49
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Figure 5-50
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Figure 5-51
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Figure 5-52
Inventory Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Figure 5-53
Number of Elements Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Figure 5-54
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Figure 5-55
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Figure 5-56
Insert/Eject Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Figure 5-57
Insert Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Figure 5-58
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Figure 5-59
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Figure 5-60
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Figure 5-61
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Figure 5-62
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Figure 5-63
Insert Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Figure 5-64
Insert Range Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Figure 5-65
Target Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Figure 5-66
Usage Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Figure 5-67
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Figure 5-68
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Figure 5-69
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Figure 5-70
Eject Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Figure 5-71
Eject Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Figure 5-72
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Figure 5-73
Eject Clean Tape Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Figure 5-74
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Figure 5-75
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Figure 5-76
Expired Tapes Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Figure 5-77
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Figure 5-78
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Figures
xiii
xiv
Figures
Figure 5-79
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Figure 5-80
Eject Clean Tape By Coordinate Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Figure 5-81
Eject Clean Tape By Coordinate Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Figure 5-82
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Figure 5-83
By VOLSER Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Figure 5-84
Eject Clean Tape By VOLSER Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Figure 5-85
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Figure 5-86
Database Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Figure 5-87
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Figure 5-88
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Figure 5-89
Element Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Figure 5-90
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Figure 5-91
Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Figure 5-92
Config Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Figure 5-93
Figure 5-94
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Figure 5-95
Learn Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Figure 5-96
Manipulate Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Figure 5-97
Manipulate Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Figure 5-98
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Figure 5-99
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Figure 5-100
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Figure 5-101
Target ID Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Figure 5-102
Parity Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Figure 5-103
Ports Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Figure 5-104
Host Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Figure 5-105
Trace Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Figure 5-106
Security Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Figure 5-107
Password Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Figure 5-108
Security is ON Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Figure 5-109
Password Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Figure 5-110
Security is OFF Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Figure 5-111
Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
6-01151-01 Rev A
22 June 2004
Figure 5-112
Password Changed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Figure 5-113
Invalid Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Figure 5-114
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Figure 5-115
Emulate Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Figure 5-116
RMU Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Figure 5-117
Name Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Figure 5-118
IP Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Figure 5-119
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Figure 5-120
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Figure 5-121
SCSI ID Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Figure 5-122
Cleaning Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Figure 5-123
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Figure 5-124
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
Figure 5-125
Usage Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Figure 5-126
View Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Figure 5-127
Utils Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Figure 5-128
Library Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Figure 5-129
Screen Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Figure 5-130
Timeout Value Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Figure 5-131
Password Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Figure 5-132
Password Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Figure 5-133
Invalid Password Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Figure 5-134
Audio Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Figure 5-135
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Figure 5-136
Time Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Figure 5-137
Date Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
Figure 5-138
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Figure 5-139
Inventory Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Figure 5-140
Update Microcode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
Figure 5-141
Element Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
Figure 5-142
Drive Range Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Figure 5-143
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Figure 5-144
Clean Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Figures
xv
xvi
Figures
Figure 5-145
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
Figure 5-146
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
Figure 5-147
Unload Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Figure 5-148
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
Figure 5-149
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
Figure 5-150
Initialize Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
Figure 5-151
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Figure 5-152
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Figure 5-153
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Figure 5-154
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Figure 5-155
Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Figure 5-156
Preventive Maintenance Due Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Figure 5-157
Confirm Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Figure 5-158
Start Dialog with No Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Figure 5-159
Start Dialog with Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Figure 5-160
Diags Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
Figure 5-161
DI/DO Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
Figure 5-162
Loopback Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
Figure 5-163
Sensors Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Figure 5-164
Wrap Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
Figure 5-165
Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
Figure 5-166
Locks Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Figure 5-167
Gripper Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Figure 5-168
Get/Put Storage Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
Figure 5-169
Continuation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
Figure 5-170
Number of Elements Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Figure 5-171
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
Figure 5-172
Get/Put Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
Figure 5-173
Figure 5-174
Number of Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
Figure 5-175
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Figure 5-176
Step Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Figure 5-177
6-01151-01 Rev A
22 June 2004
Figure 5-178
Scanner Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Figure 5-179
Adjust Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Figure 5-180
Trigger Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Figure 5-181
Fiducial Test Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Figure 5-182
Accessor Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Figure 5-183
Move Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
Figure 5-184
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
Figure 5-185
Step Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Figure 5-186
Movement Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Figure 5-187
SelfTest Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
Figure 5-188
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
Figure 5-189
Power Supply Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
Figure 5-190
Function Not Available Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
Figure 5-191
Teach Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Figure 5-192
Teach New Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Figure 5-193
Keep Learned Offsets Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Figure 5-194
Confirmation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Figure 5-195
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Figure 5-196
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Figure 5-197
Error Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Figure 5-198
Teach Current Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Figure 5-199
Keep Learned Offsets Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
Figure 5-200
Confirmation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
Figure 5-201
Starting and Ending Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
Figure 5-202
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
Figure 5-203
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
Figure 5-204
SAC Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Figure 5-205
Password Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Figure 5-206
Demo Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Figure 5-207
Include Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Figure 5-208
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Figure 5-209
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Figure 5-210
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Figures
xvii
xviii
Figures
Figure 5-211
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Figure 5-212
Password Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Figure 5-213
Other Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
Figure 5-214
About Screen (RMU Connected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Figure 5-215
About Screen (RMU Not Connected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Figure 6-1
Barcode Label Application (LTO example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Figure 6-2
Barcode Label Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Figure 6-3
Cleaning Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Figure 6-4
AutoClean Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Figure 6-5
Insert Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Figure 6-6
Range Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Figure 6-7
Enter Target Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Figure 6-8
Current Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Figure 6-9
Command Complete Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Figure 6-10
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Figure 6-11
Selected Cleaning Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Figure 6-12
Usage Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Figure 6-13
View Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6-01151-01 Rev A
Tables
Table 2-1
Drives and Storage Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Table 2-2
Scalar 1000 Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Table 2-4
Element Coordinates for Firmware 2.3 or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Table 2-5
Library Internal Indexing for Firmware 2.30 or Earlier . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Table 2-6
Library Internal Indexing for Firmware 3.0 or Later . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Table 2-7
Library External Addressing for Firmware 3.0 or Later . . . . . . . . 2-11
Table 3-1
Hazard Alert Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Table 4-1
Operator Panel Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-2
Operator Panel Push-Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 5-1
Operating State and Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Table 6-1
Barcode Label Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Table 6-2
Supported Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Table 7-1
SAC Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Table 7-2
Operator Intervention Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Table 7-3
Error Log Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
xix
xx
Tables
6-00054-02 Rev A
1
About this
Guide
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Associated Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Explanation of Symbols and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
ADIC Technical Assistance Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Regulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Federal Communication Commission Class A Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
IC Notice (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
EN 55022 Compliance (Czech Republic Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
CE Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
VCCI Notices (Japan Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-2
About this Guide
6-00054-02 Rev A
1-
Overview
This guide contains information and instructions necessary
for the safe operation of the Scalar 1000 1 Library. This chapter
is organized as follows:
Intended Audience on page 1-3
Organization on page 1-3
Associated Documents on page 1-4
Explanation of Symbols and Notes on page 1-4
ADIC Technical Assistance Center on page 1-5
Regulatory Notices on page 1-6
Intended Audience
This guide is intended for operators, trained customer
specialists, and maintenance personnel of the service partner
who interacts with the Scalar 1000.
Organization
This publication contains chapters detailing the operation of
the Scalar 1000. The chapters topics include:
Chapter 1
About this Guide - Describes the intended

audience, organization, associated
documents, explanation of symbols and
notes, and how to obtain additional
assistance.
Chapter 2
System Description - Describes general

information, library modules, internal
components, connectivity, and I/O status
and control.
Chapter 3
Safety - Describes the hazard symbols,

messages, safety features, and
considerations for safe operation.
Chapter 4
Operation - Describes the Operator Panel,

the Scalar 1000 start-up and shutdown
operations, and the Remote Management
Unit operations and menus.
1. Scalar 1000 is a registered trademark of ADIC. Throughout the remainder of this document the
Scalar 1000 library is referred to as the Scalar 1000 or the library.
22 June 2004
Overview
1-3
Chapter 5
Menus and Commands - Describes the Scalar

1000 menus and commands.
Chapter 6
Processing Media - Describes the Insert/

Eject Station, media types, media
processing, and cleaning media.
Chapter 7
Error Messages - Describes message

processing, Service Action Code (SACs),
and Operator Intervention Messages.
Index
Associated Documents
6-01151-xx
Scalar 1000 Maintenance Guide
6-00055-xx
Scalar 1000 SCSI Reference Manual
Explanation of Symbols and Notes

The following symbols and highlighted passages note
important information.
Detailed explanations for the above symbols are provided in

Hazard Alert Messages on page 3-3.
1-4
About this Guide
<1> + <2>
Press these keys simultaneously.
Italics
Headline, for example, Chapter 2,

Description
File name, for example, AMUINST.EXE
Bold
Terms appearing on the Operator Panel

for example, Utilities
Operating element/key on the Operating
Panel
Courier
Command line,
Switch position, for example, ON, OFF
6-00054-02 Rev A
ADIC Technical Assistance Center

If problems cannot be solved with the aid of this document,
contact the ADIC Technical Assistance Center (ATAC).
In the USA:
800.827.3822
Outside the USA, toll free:
00.800.9999.3822
email:
support@adic.com
Before contacting the ATAC, make sure you have the Serial
Number for your library. To locate the Serial Number, do one
of the following:
22 June 2004
Open the Control Module (CM) back door. Look for the
Serial Number located in the upper left inside panel.
From the Operator Panel Main Menu, select Database

Menu Config Dialog. The library Serial Number is
listed in the Serial# field.
ADIC Technical Assistance Center
1-5
Regulatory Notices
Federal Communication Commission
Class A Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
To meet FCC emissions limits, properly shielded and
grounded cables and connectors must be used. The user
accepts responsibility for radio or television interference
caused by improperly shielded or grounded cables and
connectors or by unauthorized modifications or changes to
the equipment. Unauthorized modifications or changes could
void the users authority to operate the equipment.
Obtain a copy of the following booklet:
FCC Interference Handbook, 1996, available from the U.S.
Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402, Stock
No. 004-000-00450-7.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Use only shielded cables for connecting peripherals to this

device to reduce the possibility of interference with radio
and television reception. Using shielded cables ensures that
you maintain the appropriate FCC radio frequency
emissions compliance (for a Class A device) or FCC
certification (for a Class B device) of this product.
In compliance with FCC regulations, the following
information is provided on the device or devices covered in
this document.
1-6
About this Guide
6-00054-02 Rev A
Product Name
Scalar 1000
Model number
SC1000
Company name
Advanced Digital Information Corporation

PO Box 97057
Redmond, WA 98073-9757 USA
(425) 881-8004
IC Notice (Canada Only)

Most tape libraries are classified by the Industry Canada (IC)
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard #3 (ICES-003) as
Class A digital devices. To determine which classification
(Class A or B) applies to your tape library, examine all
registration labels located on the bottom or the back panel of
your library. A statement in the form of IC Class A ICES-3
or IC Class B ICES-3 will be located on one of these labels.
Note that Industry Canada regulations provide that changes
or modifications not expressly approved by the tape library
manufacturer could void your authority to operate this
equipment.
This Class A (or Class B, if so indicated on the registration
label) digital apparatus meets the requirements of the
Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numrique de la Classe B (ou Classe A, si ainsi
indiqu sur ltiquette denregistration) respecte toutes les
exigences du Reglement sur le Materiel Brouilleur du Canada.
22 June 2004
Regulatory Notices
1-7
EN 55022 Compliance (Czech

Republic Only)
This device belongs to category A devices as described in EN
55022, unless it is specifically stated that it is a category B
device on the specification label. The following applies to
devices in category A of EN 55022 (radius of protection up to
30 meters). The user of the device is obliged to take all steps
necessary to remove sources of interference to
telecommunication or other devices.
CE Notice
Marking by the symbol
indicates compliance of this tape
library to the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) directive
of the European Community. Such marking is indicative that
this tape library meets or exceeds the following technical
standards:
1-8
About this Guide
EN 55022:1998
Limits and Methods of Measurement of

Radio Interference Characteristics of
Information Technology Equipment.
This system is an EN 55022 Class A device.
EN 50082-1
Information technology equipment Immunity characteristics Limits and

methods of measurements.
EN 61000-3-2
Harmonic current emissions test.
EN61000-3-3
Voltage fluctuations and flicker in

low-voltage supply systems test.
EN 61000-4-2
Electrostatic discharge immunity test.
EN 61000-4-3
Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic

field immunity test.
EN 61000-4-4
Electrical fast transient/burst immunity

test.
EN 61000-4-5
Surge immunity test.
6-00054-02 Rev A
22 June 2004
EN 61000-4-6
Immunity to conducted disturbances,

induced by radio-frequency fields.
EN 61000-4-8
Power frequency magnetic field immunity

test.
EN 61000-4-11
Voltage dips, short interruptions and

voltage variations immunity test.
EN 60950:1992
+ Amd.1:1993
+ Amd.2:1993
with
considerations
to Amd.3:1995
Safety of Information Technology

Equipment including Electrical Business
Equipment.
Regulatory Notices
1-9
VCCI Notices (Japan Only)

This is a Class A product based on the standard of the
Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information
Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a
domestic environment, radio disturbance may occur, in which
case, the user may be required to take corrective actions.
NOTE: VCCI regulations provide that changes or

modifications not expressly approved by the Dell Computer
Corporation could void your authority to operate this
equipment.
Declaration of Conformity
The signed Declaration of Conformity is on file with
Advanced Digital Information Corporation, 17275 NE 67th
Court, Redmond, Washington 98052, and ADIC Europe, ZAC
des Basses Auges 1, rue Alfred de Vigny, 78112 Fourqueux,
France.
1-10
About this Guide
6-00054-02 Rev A
2
System
Description
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Internal Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cartridge Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Cartridge Accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
SAN Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
SCSI Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Scalar DLC Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2-2
System Description
6-00054-02 Rev A
22-
General Description
The Scalar 1000 automates the storage, retrieval, and control
of 3590, LTO, DLT, SDLT, and AIT cartridge tapes. Cartridges
are mounted and dismounted in tape drives using application
software from the host without operator intervention.
Note
If the ADIC 8590/
IBM 3590 tape
drive is installed in
either the Control
or the Expansion
Module, the
modules must be of
the large footprint
type. Adding an
extension frame to
a normal frame
increases the depth
of the frame.
The Scalar 1000 is a linear storage library that can be expanded

from a single media library to a mixed media library. The
Scalar 1000 consists of a Control Module (CM) and up to three
Expansion Modules (EMs). See Figure 2-1 on page 2-5. The
CM contains library control hardware, the Cartridge
Accessor, an Insert/Eject Station (I/E) Station, an Operator
Panel, cartridge storage cells, and tape drives. The EM can
contain tape drives and cartridge storage.
The Scalar 1000 can be configured for approximately
118 to 1182 cartridges (the cartridge capacity depends on the
library configuration and features installed). See Table 2-1.
Table 2-1
Drives and Storage Capacities

High Profile
Drives
Cartridges
22 June 2004
Low Profile
3590/DLT
LTO
DLT/SDLT
AIT
1 - 16
1 - 48
1 - 48
1 - 48
118 - 788
140 - 938
118 - 788
237 - 1182
General Description
2-3
Cartridge storage quantity varies by the number of modules

and tape drives in the modules. Table 2-2 lists the quantity of
media contained by the storage cells for the CM and EMs
configured for the different media types.
Table 2-2
Scalar 1000 Configurations
High Profile
Frame
Low Profile
DLT/
SDLT/
LTO
Tape
Drives
DLT/SDLT
Cartridge
Capacity
LTO
Cartridge
Capacity
237
1-6
7 - 12
158
118
200
152
2 - 12
552
14 - 24
432
1-6
7 - 12
13 - 18
19 - 24
368
328
288
248
450
402
352
306
2 - 12
867
14 - 24
747
26 - 36
627
1-6
7 - 12
13 - 18
19 - 24
25 - 30
31 - 36
578
538
498
458
418
378
700
652
604
556
508
460
2 - 12
1182
14 - 24
1062
26 - 36
942
38 - 48
822
1-6
7 - 12
13 - 18
19 - 24
25 - 30
31 - 36
37 - 42
43 - 48
788
148
708
668
628
588
548
508
950
902
854
806
758
710
662
641
Tape
Drives
3590/DLT
Cartridge
Capacity
AIT
Tape
Drives
AIT
Cartridge
Capacity
Control
Module
1-2
3-4
158
118
2 - 12
Control
Module
and 1
Expansion
Module
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
368
328
288
248
Control
Module
and 2
Expansion
Modules
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
11 - 12
578
538
498
458
418
378
Control
Module
and 3
Expansion
Modules
1-2
3-4
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
11 - 12
13 - 14
15 - 16
788
748
708
668
628
588
548
508
When mixing high-profile drive technology with DLT/SDLT,

the CM must be configured for high-profile drive technology,
while DLT/SDLT consumes separate EMs.
2-4
System Description
6-00054-02 Rev A
Modules
The Scalar 1000 Library consists of two types of modules: a
Control Module (CM) and an Expansion Module (EM). The
information in this section is organized as follows:
Control Module on page 2-6
Expansion Module on page 2-6
Door
Lock,
Handle,
and
Key
Operator
Panel
Insert/Eject
Station
Expansion
Module
Control
Module
Figure 2-1
22 June 2004
Control Module and Expansion Module
Modules
2-5
Control Module
The CM is a single module, standalone Scalar 1000 library. It
contains an Operator LCD panel, AC and DC power supplies,
robot control electronics, and host interfaces. It can be
attached to an EM to create an expanded Scalar 1000 library.
The CM differs in tape and drive bay capacity. See Figure 2-1
on page 2-5.
Each drive bay has the space equivalent of 48 LTO, 40 SDLT,
44 3590, or 60 AIT cartridges. Each drive bay accommodates:
One or two 3590 or High Profile DLT tape drives
One to six DLT/SDLT or LTO tape drives
From 1 to 12 AIT tape drives
Expansion Module
The EM extends the length of the aisle and adds drives and
cartridges to the library. The Scalar 1000 maximum
configuration includes three EMs. These modules extend the
X-rails (top and bottom) which allow the Accessor to travel
the length of the library. See Figure 2-1 on page 2-5.
2-6
System Description
6-00054-02 Rev A
Internal Components
The Scalar 1000 consists of the following internal components:
Tape Drives
Cartridge Storage
Cartridge Accessor
Tape Cartridges
Insert/Eject Station
Tape Drives
The Scalar 1000 supports the following tape drives:
22 June 2004
3490E type drive (Plasmon/Philips LMS TD 3610)
NCTP type drive (Plasmon/Philips NCTP)
3590 type drive (IBM 3590-B1A/EMASS 8590)
3590 type drive (IBM 3590-E1A)
DLT type high profile drive (Quantum Models 4001 and

7001)
DLT type low profile drive (Quantum Models 4001S,

7001S, and 8001S)
SDLT type drive (Quantum SDLT-220 and SDLT-320)
AIT type drive (Sony Model SDX-310C, SDX-500C, and

SDX-700C)
LTO-1 type drive (IBM Ultrium TD1)
LTO-2 type drive (IBM Ultrium TD2)
Internal Components
2-7
Cartridge Storage
The Scalar 1000 contains cartridge storage cells in all attached
modules in addition to any tape drives installed. The CM
must be the first frame in the library.
Table 2-3 shows the coordinates for the storage cells for
libraries with Firmware 2.24 or earlier installed.
Table 2-3
Storage Cell Coordinates for Firmware 2.24 or Earlier

Frame
Column
Row
01 - 04
A-E
01 - 63
The Frame number can be from one to four; the Columns are
letters A to E in each module; the Rows are numbered from
top to bottom (1 to 42 for 3590 and DLT cartridges, and 1 to 63
for AIT cartridges).
For libraries with Firmware level 2.3 or later, use the
following coordinate system to locate different elements
(storage cell, drive, etc.) within the library. See Table 2-4.
Table 2-4
Element
Type
Element Coordinates for Firmware 2.3 or Later

ID
Frame
(Module)
Section
Column
Row
Storage
01 - 04
1-4
A-E
01 - 18
I/E Station
01
01 - 18
Drives
01 - 04
1-2
A-B
01 - 06
The Element Type can be I for I/E Station, D for Drive, and S
for Storage. The frame number can be from one to four. The
Sections are numbered, for storage, from one to four top to
bottom, and for drives, one to two bottom to top. The
Columns are letters A to E in each section, the Rows are
numbered 1 to a maximum of 18 from top to bottom
depending on the section. See Figure 2-2 on page 2-9.
2-8
System Description
6-00054-02 Rev A
Figure 2-2
Coordinate System
Figure 2-2 shows additional information that can be used to
identify various fields in the coordinate system.
To manipulate the media within the library, the host must
reference each movement with source and target
designations. Element indexing/addressing specifies
precisely which cells within the library are to be used.
See Table 2-5 on page 2-10 through Table 2-7 on page 2-11 for
information about indexing/addressing.
22 June 2004
Internal Components
2-9
Table 2-5
Library Internal Indexing for Firmware 2.30 or Earlier

Internal Indexing Range
Element Type
3590/DLT
AIT
Storage
0 - 787
0 - 1181
I/E Station
788 - 799
1182 - 1199
Drives
800 - 847
1200 - 1247
Cartridge Accessor
848
1248
Table 2-6
Element
Type
2-10
Library Internal Indexing for Firmware 3.0 or Later

Indexing Range
3590/DLT/SDLT
LTO
AIT
Storage
0 - 787
0 - 937
0 - 1181
I/E Station
1182 - 1193
1182 - 1193
1182 - 1199
Drives
1200 - 1247
1200 - 1247
1200 - 1247
Cartridge
Accessor
1248
1248
1248
System Description
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 2-7
Element
Type
22 June 2004
Library External Addressing for Firmware 3.0 or Later

External Addressing Range
3590/DLT/SDLT
LTO
AIT
Cartridge
Accessor
1
(0x0001)
1
(0x0001)
1
(0x0001)
I/E Station
16 - 27
(0x0010) - (0x001B)
16 - 27
(0x0010) - (0x001B)
16 - 33
(0x0010) - (0x0021)
Drives
256 - 303
(0x0100) - (0x012F)
256 - 303
(0x0100) - (0x012F)
256 - 303
(0x0100) - (0x012F)
Storage
4096 - 4883
(0x1000) - (0x1313)
4096 - 5033
(0x1000) - (0x13A9)
4096 - 5277
(0x1000) - (0x149D)
Internal Components
2-11
Cartridge Accessor
The Cartridge Accessor identifies and moves cartridges
between the storage cells, tape drives, and the Insert/Eject
Station. See Figure 2-3.
Top X-Rail Assembly
Y-Axis Assembly
Gripper Assembly
Bottom X-Rail Assembly
Figure 2-3
2-12
System Description
Cartridge Accessor
6-00054-02 Rev A
The Cartridge Accessor has:
A gripper assembly for mounting a cartridge gripper and

a barcode scanner.
A cartridge gripper picks and places cartridges in

storage cells, tape drives, or the Insert/Eject station.
A barcode scanner reads the external labels on the

cartridges. The barcode scanner is used during the
inventory and teach processes.
An X-Axis drive for moving the gripper assembly the

length of the rails in the CM and the EMs.
A Y-Axis drive for moving the gripper assembly vertically

in the CM and the EMs.
Tape Cartridges
Each tape cartridge in the Scalar 1000 must have an external
label that is operator and machine readable to identify the
barcode number. The external label contains a minimum of
5 characters and a maximum of 16 characters for the barcode
depending on the operating modes.
The Scalar 1000 can operate in one of three modes:
Default Mode - six characters (up to two additional

characters are ignored)
Media ID mode - six characters, plus one or two media

identifiers, or for AIT, a checksum character (ignored).
Extended Mode - 5 to 16 characters, may include media

identifiers and checksum values.
The barcode number is composed of uppercase A to Z

characters and numeric 0 to 9 characters. The Scalar 1000
currently supports Code 39 and Storage Technology-type
labels.
In Media ID mode, seven or eight characters are used to
identify the cartridge and type. The cartridge type is one or
two characters that are either separate from or included with
the barcode label.
For additional information, see Understanding Barcodes on
page 10.
22 June 2004
Internal Components
2-13
Insert/Eject Station
The Insert/Eject (I/E) Station allows insertion and ejection of
cartridges without interrupting the normal operation of the
library.
The I/E Station is designed to handle cartridge magazines.
Each magazine is capable of holding six -inch cartridges or
nine AIT cartridges. A maximum of two magazines of any
types can be present in the I/E Station. To locate the I/E
Station, see Figure 2-1 on page 2-5.
Connectivity
The Scalar 1000 offers several different connectivity options,
allowing the library to support a wide range of backup
topologies and applications. Flexible library connectivity
delivers active support for loop and switched fabric Fibre
Channel protocols, along with SCSI.
SAN Connectivity
The Scalar 1000 can be connected to a Fibre Channel Storage
Area Network (SAN) via the SNC.
For LTO-2 drives, each SNC 5100 controls up to three drives.
With 4 SNCs, you can connect 12 drives.
For other drives, each SNC 5100 controls up to four drives.
With 3 SNCs, you can connect 12 drives.
The SNC provides four SCSI bus connections, one ethernet,
and two Fibre Channel connections. The SNC allows native
SCSI devices (for example: robot controller and tape drives) to
be seen by any hosts that are attached to the SAN.
The library controller and the tape drives access the SAN via
the SNCs that can be installed in a Scalar 1000 CM or EM. See
Figure 2-4 on page 2-15.
2-14
System Description
6-00054-02 Rev A
Figure 2-4
22 June 2004
Indirect Fibre Channel Attachment
Connectivity
2-15
SCSI Connectivity
The Scalar 1000 can be directly connected to one or two SCSI
buses. Because each SCSI bus is independent, it can be Single
Ended, High Voltage Differential, or Low Voltage
Differential. Both ends of each bus must be terminated and a
terminator is shipped with each SCSI adapter card ordered.
The minimum configuration of a Scalar 1000 library requires
one SCSI adapter (Single Ended, High Voltage Differential, or
Low Voltage Differential).
Although the Scalar 1000 can be attached to a wide SCSI bus,
it is not a wide SCSI device and its SCSI ID must be in the
range of 0 to 7. See Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5
2-16
System Description
Direct SCSI Attachment
6-00054-02 Rev A
Scalar DLC Option

The Scalar 1000, through an optional Scalar Distributed
Library Control (Scalar DLC), provides the industrys most
advanced combination of management and diagnostics.
The Scalar DLC attaches to the library SCSI bus.
The host continues to directly attach to the drives via a SCSI
Interface.
See the ADIC Scalar DLC documentation for detailed
description of the interfaces supported. See Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6
22 June 2004
Network Attachment
Scalar DLC Option
2-17
Remote Management Unit

The factory-installed Remote Management Unit (RMU) in
each system uses a standard web browser for remote library
access.
The supported browsers are:
Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4.0 and above
Netscape Navigator version 4.7 and above
With an RMU, you are able to do the following:
Update RMU firmware
Update library firmware
Access the library status
Make configuration changes
Access the library Operator Panel
Access Scalar 1000 documentation
Retrieve library command and event logs
The RMU supports Simple Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) version 2.0 and acts as an SNMP-server. The RMU
acquires Tape Alert 3.0 compatible information from the
library over the serial interface port and sends that
information to a SNMP manager. The RMU also detects a
power loss and generates a SNMP trap for notification.
2-18
System Description
6-00054-02 Rev A
3
Safety
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Hazard Alert Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Area of Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Library Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Mechanical Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Main Circuit Breaker (Power) Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-2
Safety
6-00054-02 Rev A
3-
Overview
Avoid dangerous situations while operating the Scalar 1000
by following all safety procedures and operating the
equipment carefully. Read and follow all instructions in this
guide.
Note
In addition to the
safety
instructions in
this guide, local
and professional
safety rules
apply.
It is mandatory that operators of the Scalar 1000 library

understand and comply with all instructions contained in this
guide and other related documentation.
Intended Use
This equipment is designed for processing magnetic tape
cartridges and any other application is not considered the
intended use. The user assumes all risk and ADIC shall not be
held liable for damage arising from unauthorized use of the
library.
Hazard Alert Messages

ADIC classifies hazards in several categories. Table 3-1 shows
the relationship of the symbols, signal words, actual hazards,
and possible consequences.
Table 3-1
Symbol
Hazard Alert Message
Damage to ...
Signal Word
Definition
Consequence
DANGER
Imminent hazardous
situation
Death or serious
injury
WARNING
Potential hazardous
situation
Possible death or
serious injury
CAUTION
Less hazardous
situation
Possible minor or
moderate injury
Imminent hazardous
electrical situation
Death or serious
injury
Persons
Persons
22 June 2004
Overview
3-3
Table 3-1
Symbol
Hazard Alert Message (Continued)
Damage to ...
Signal Word
Definition
Consequence
Material
Caution
Potential damaging
situation
Person
Warning
Potential hazardous
situation
Possible damage
to the product or
environment
Possible death or
serious injury
Material
Static
Sensitive
Potential electronic
damaging situation
Possible damage
to the product
Tips for operators
No hazardous or
damaging
consequences
Important or useful
information
No hazardous or
damaging
consequences
Note
Specially emphasized paragraphs in this guide warn of

danger or draw attention to important information. These
paragraphs and their associated symbols include:
The danger exists of a fatal electric shock. At places
designated with this symbol, electrical current can be
present. Before starting any work, always confirm that all
electrical connections are free of electrical current.
Caution
Warning
When used with the signal word Warning, this symbol

warns of a dangerous situation that threatens personnel
with serious injury or death.
Caution
When used with the signal word Caution, this symbol

means that specific regulations, rules, notices, and working
procedures must be observed. Ignoring this symbol can lead
to equipment damage or destruction or to other property
damage.
STATIC
SENSITIVE
3-4
This symbol indicates the presence of a laser.

Caution - use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
Safety
This symbol indicates that the risk of equipment damage

exists due to static discharge.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Note
This symbol draws attention to user tips. No dangerous or

damaging consequences for personnel or property are
associated with this symbol.
This symbol indicates important or useful information. No
dangerous or damaging consequences for personnel or
property are associated with this symbol.
Area of Application
Note
Other
manufacturer
documentation is
an integral part of
the Scalar 1000
documentation
set.
This information applies to the entire Scalar 1000 family.

Further safety instructions for components used in the
equipment are not invalidated by these instructions.
Protective Devices
The Scalar 1000 is equipped with the following protective
devices:
Monitored locked access to the library
Main Circuit Breaker switch
Library Access
The Scalar 1000 is completely surrounded by an enclosure.
The library can only be accessed through monitored access
doors.
The enclosure around the library separates the danger area of
the Scalar 1000 library from the normal working area. The
danger area of the library is the area in which personnel can
be injured by component movements.
Warning
Movements of mechanical components in the library can

cause serious injury. Access to the library is restricted to
authorized personnel only.
Warning
Look into the aisle before you apply library power to make
sure there are no obstructions or personnel present.
Mechanical movement within the library can cause serious
injury.
22 June 2004
Area of Application
3-5
Mechanical Lock
The library access doors can only be opened with a key from
the outside. Authorized personnel are responsible for the
security of the key.
Main Circuit Breaker (Power) Switch

Switching off the Main Circuit Breaker switch removes all
power and causes the movement electronics to shut off. All
movements of the Accessor stop immediately. In case of
danger to personnel or property, immediately switch off the
Main Circuit Breaker switch.
3-6
Caution
Except in emergencies, stop the Scalar 1000 with the normal

shutdown procedure before switching off the Main Circuit
Breaker switch. ADIC is not responsible for damage caused
by improper use of the Main Circuit Breaker switch; such
risk lies entirely with the user.
Warning
Movements of mechanical components in the Scalar 1000

can cause serious injury. Before turning the Main Circuit
Breaker switch on and restarting the Scalar 1000, confirm
that no danger exists to personnel or property.
Warning
injury.
Safety
6-00054-02 Rev A
4
Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Using the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Starting the Scalar 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Shutting Down the Scalar 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Normal Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Emergency Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Restarting the Scalar 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Using the Remote Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Supported Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
System Administrator Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
RMU Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Setting up the RMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Accessing the RMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Logging into the RMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Checking Status and General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Configuring Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Configuring SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Downloading the SNMP MIB File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Configuring RMU Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Adding/Removing Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Changing a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Configuring the Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Synchronizing with an NTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Updating Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Viewing Diagnostic Files (Library and RMU Logs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Using the Operator Panel (via the RMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Viewing Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-2
Operation
6-00054-02 Rev A
4-
Overview
This chapter describes the Operator Panel, Scalar 1000 start
and shutdown procedures, and the Remote Management Unit
(RMU) operations and menus.
Using the Operator Panel

The Operator Panel is an interactive path between the
operator and the Scalar 1000. See Figure 4-1 on page 4-4.
Scalar 1000 operator can perform the following functions
listed below:
Starting the Scalar 1000
Shutting down the Scalar 1000
Handling media
Refer to Inserting Media on page 6 and Ejecting Media on page

8 for media handling procedures. In the case of equipment
failures, the operator can perform media processing.
22 June 2004
Overview
4-3
4X20 LCD Panel
Speaker Vent
Figure 4-1
4-4
Operation
Operator Panel
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 4-1 illustrates and describes Operator Panel indicators.

Table 4-1
Operator Panel Indicators
Indicator
Description
The Locked indicator illuminates when the Insert/Eject Station is locked.
While locked, no media may be added or removed through the Insert/Eject
Station.
The Power On indicator illuminates when power is applied to the Scalar 1000
library.
The Ready indicator illuminates when the Scalar 1000 is ready to accept
commands or execute Accessor movements.
Table 4-2 illustrates and describes Operator Panel

push-buttons.
Table 4-2
Operator Panel Push-Buttons
Push-Button
Description
Use Up Arrow to:
scroll the display to show the previous lines.
move the cursor (>) up from selection to selection.
increment the current value in a numerical entry field.
22 June 2004
Using the Operator Panel
4-5
Table 4-2
Operator Panel Push-Buttons (Continued)
Push-Button
Description
Use Down Arrow to:
scroll the display to show next line.
move the cursor (>) down from selection to selection.
decrement the current value in a numerical entry field.
Use Enter to:

select the current option as the next action to be performed by the library,
the cursor (>) indicates the chosen option.
act as a TAB button to the next required entry field when multiple field
entries are being entered. In this case, the button cycles through all the entry
locations until the Accept option is chosen (with Y).
Use Escape to:
leave the current menu and return to the previous menu, if it exists.
Leave the Help menu and return to the previous menu.
Use Help to display help text for the current selected item if available. In this
mode, the Arrow buttons can be used to scroll through the help text and the
Escape button is used to exit help.
Use Ready to transition the library from a Ready state to Not Ready or Not
Ready to the Ready state.
Holding down the push-buttons will cycle through the

options. The longer the push-button is held down, the faster it
will cycle.
4-6
Operation
6-00054-02 Rev A

Use the following procedure to start the Scalar 1000.
Caution
If an RMU is installed in the library, wait at least one minute

between powering down and powering up the library. This
allows the RMU to properly reset.
Step 1
Make sure that all doors are closed and

mechanically locked on the Control Module (CM)
and any Expansion Modules (EMs).
Step 2
Locate the Main Circuit Breaker switch in the lower

right corner at the back of the CM and each EM.
See Figure 4-2 for the location of the Main Circuit
Breaker switch.
Expansion
Module
Control
Module
Main Circuit Breaker Switches

Figure 4-2
22 June 2004
Main Circuit Breaker Switch Locations (Back View of CM/EM)
4-7
Step 3
Set the Main Circuit Breaker switch on each EM to

ON.
Step 4
Set the Main Circuit Breaker switch on the CM to

ON.
Warning
Movements of mechanical components in the Scalar 1000

can cause serious injury. Before turning the Main Circuit
Breaker switch ON, confirm that no danger exists to
personnel or property.
Warning
injury.
Power is applied to the Scalar 1000. The CM embedded
software starts the boot process. The Power On indicator
illuminates and the Initial Screen displays status.
The firmware initiates a self test procedure, performs an
auto-configuration, and inventories the library. When
all firmware procedures are complete the Operator Panel
LCD screen displays the Main Screen. See Figure 4-3.
MAIN SCREEN
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
Idle
Online.........Ready
Figure 4-3
4-8
Operation
Main Screen
6-00054-02 Rev A
Shutting Down the Scalar 1000

You can shutdown the Scalar 1000 using the normal
shutdown procedure (recommended for most situations) or
the emergency shutdown procedure.
Attention
Except in emergency situations, shutdown the Scalar 1000

using the normal shutdown and not the emergency
shutdown procedure.
Normal Shutdown
Use the following shutdown procedure to shutdown the
Scalar 1000.
If an RMU is installed in the library, wait at least one minute
between powering down the library and powering up the
library. This allows the RMU to properly reset.
Step 1
If necessary, use the

button to return to the
Main Menu. The selector defaults to the Mode
selection.
Step 2
Press the
Step 3
From the Mode screen, use the

the Shutdown mode.
Step 4
Press the
button.
button to select
button.
The cursor moves to Shutdown mode and the state

automatically changes to Shutdown. The Accessor
completes the current task, returns to the home position,
and the reboot message appears. See Figure 4-4.
The library may now

be rebooted.
Figure 4-4
Reboot Message
Step 5

right corner at the back of the CM.
See Figure 4-2 on page 4-7 for the location of the
22 June 2004
Shutting Down the Scalar 1000
4-9
Step 6
Set the Main Circuit Breaker switch to OFF.

Power is removed from the Scalar 1000. All Accessor
movements halt immediately.
Step 7
Repeat Step 5 and Step 6 for each additional EM.
Emergency Shutdown
Use the following shutdown procedure only in emergency
situations.
Caution
Except in emergency situations, shutdown the Scalar 1000

using the normal shutdown procedure before switching off
the Main Circuit Breaker. Refer to Normal Shutdown on
page 4-9 for more information.
Step 1

right corner at the back of the CM.
Step 2
Set the Main Circuit Breaker switch to OFF.

The Gripper does a controlled gravity descent to the
bottom and Accessor movements halt.
Step 3
For each additional EM:

a. Locate the Main Circuit Breaker switch at the
lower right corner in the back of the CM.
b. Set the circuit breaker to OFF.
Power is removed from the Scalar 1000. All Accessor
movements halt immediately.
4-10
Operation
6-00054-02 Rev A
Restarting the Scalar 1000

Use the following procedure to restart the Scalar 1000.
Power up must be delayed by one minute after a power
down condition to allow the RMU to properly reset.
Step 1
If applicable, correct any situations that required

the Scalar 1000 shutdown.
Step 2
Refer to Starting the Scalar 1000 on page 4-7 for

instructions on the Scalar 1000 start procedure.
Using the Remote Management Unit

The Remote Management Unit (RMU) is a component in the
library that provides remote access to the library by means of
a Web browser. All functions listed here are available without
the need of a dedicated server (or separate software).
The RMU performs the following functions:
22 June 2004
Provides remote operation of all library Operator Panel

functions by means of a Web browser.
Allows you to check the status of the system, firmware

levels, and other useful information.
Updates RMU firmware.
Supports Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

version 2.0 and acts as an SNMP-server, generating SNMP
traps and responding to SNMP requests.
Supports ADIC Library Management Information Base

(MIB) version 2.0.
Acquires Tape Alert 3.0 information from the library and

sends that information to an SNMP manager.
Detects a power loss and generates an SNMP trap for

notification.
Enables the retrieval of library logs, and drive and RMU

diagnostic files.
Allows RMU configuration changes such as network,

users, and date/time.
Provides online access to documentation.
Restarting the Scalar 1000
4-11
The following screen is the opening screen of the RMU.
Supported Browsers
The RMU supports the following browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5.0 and above
Netscape Navigator version 4.01 for Unix and 4.7X for

other environments
System Administrator Responsibilities

The System Administrator (SA) must setup the RMU for
proper operation. The SA responsibilities include establishing
a network address for the RMU and establishing the Uniform
Resource Locator (URL).
The network address consists of an Internet Protocol (IP)
address, subnet mask, and gateway IP address. Refer to RMU
Submenu on page 5-87 for information about setting the
network address via the Operator Panel.
After the network address has been established, the SA
should use the web browser to test the RMU and URL. Once
the URL has been verified and accounts have been created, the
SA can distribute the URL address to the potential RMU
users. The SA can delete users and change any user password.
RMU Prerequisites
The RMU requires a network address that consists of an
Internet Protocol (IP) address, subnet mask, and gateway IP
Address.
4-12
Operation
6-00054-02 Rev A
Once you have this information, input it to the RMU by means

of the Operator Panel. For more information, see the
instructions that follow.
Setting up the RMU

Once you have obtained a network address for the RMU, enter
this information into the RMU by means of the library
Operator Panel.
To configure the RMU
Step 1
From Operator Panel Main Menu, select Setup

Library RMU.
The RMU Submenu is shown.
>Name...
IP...
Step 2
Select Name.
The Name Dialog is shown.
Name : webfoot3
Accept : N
Step 3
Enter the hostname using the Up, Down, and Next

buttons.
Step 4
Select Y to accept the changes.
Step 5
Select IP.
The IP Dialog is shown.
IP : 100<100.100.100
Sub: 255.255.255.255
Gat: 100.100.100.100
Accept: N
22 June 2004
4-13
Step 6
Using the Up, Down, and Next buttons, enter the IP

address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway IP address.
Step 7
Select Y to accept the changes.
Accessing the RMU

Before you begin using the RMU, make certain you have
configured your RMU with the correct network address.
To access the RMU
Step 1
Open a Web browser.
Step 2
Point your browser to the RMU IP address,

excluding any leading zeros. For example, if your
IP address is 182.073.056.205, go to the following
address: http://182.73.56.205.
Note
For information
on determining
or setting your
RMU IP address,
see Setting up the
RMU on page
4-13.
The RMU user interface appears.
Logging into the RMU

Note
The default user
login and
password are
admin and secure,
respectively.
Some of the features of the RMU require you to log in.

To log into the RMU
When prompted, enter your user name and password.
Note, the user name and password are case sensitive.
Checking Status and General

Information
You can use the RMU to remotely check the status of a library
and obtain general information about the library. For
example, you can check drive status or get the firmware level
of your library.
To check status and obtain general information
Step 1
Click the Status tab.

The following information appears:
4-14
Operation
6-00054-02 Rev A
Library Status - Indicates whether the library is

online or offline.
Drive Status - Indicates the type and quantity

of tape drives in the library.
RMU User - Indicates the user name and IP

address of the current user.
Hostname - Indicates the hostname of the

RMU.
IP Address - Indicates the IP address for the

RMU connection.
MAC Address - Indicates the Media Access

Control (MAC) address of the RMU. This is also
the serial number of the RMU.
Library Serial # - Indicates the library serial

number.
SNMP - Indicates whether SNMP requests and

alerts are enabled or disabled.
SNMP Alerts - Indicates whether the SNMP

Alert notification feature is enabled or disabled.
Library Firmware - Indicates the current level

of library firmware.
RMU Firmware - Indicates the current level of

RMU firmware.
Configuring Network Parameters

You can reconfigure the hostname, IP address, subnet
mask, and gateway address through the RMU. This feature
requires you to log in to the RMU. See Logging into the RMU
on page 4-14 for more information.
To configure the network parameters
Step 1
Click the Configuration tab.
Step 2
In the Network Configuration area, enter the new

hostname, IP address, subnet mask, and gateway
address.
Step 3
Click Submit and review your changes (indicated

in red).
Step 4
Enter your password and click Confirm to

complete the procedure.
The new values are saved. Note that you may need
to redirect your Web browser if you are logged out.
22 June 2004
4-15
Configuring SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a set of
protocols used to manage nodes on an IP network. You can
configure the RMU to send alerts to and respond to requests
from an SNMP management application.
To configure SNMP
Step 1
Step 2
In the SNMP Configuration area, do the following:
To enable or disable the feature, select ON or

OFF in the SNMP Enabled drop-down.
To enable or disable SNMP alerts, select ON or

OFF in the Alerts Enabled drop-down. SNMP
must be enabled if you want SNMP alerts
enabled.
In Manager, enter the SNMP server address.
In Public Name, enter the name of the readonly SNMP community.
In Private Name, enter the name of the

read/write SNMP community.
Step 3

in red).
Step 4

The new values are saved. Note that you may need
to redirect your Web browser if you are logged out.
Step 5
Click Done.
You may be instructed to reboot the RMU.
4-16
Operation
6-00054-02 Rev A
Downloading the SNMP MIB File

The SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) file allows
an SNMP management application to understand the SNMP
database and alerts generated by the RMU. If you are running
an SNMP management application and need the library MIB,
you can download it by means of the RMU.
To download the SNMP MIB file
Step 1
Click SNMP MIB in the left pane of the RMU

interface.
Step 2
Right-click Download SNMP MIB and click Save

Target As.
Step 3
Browse to your SNMP management server and

click Save.
You will need to load the MIB file into the SNMP
management application.
Configuring RMU Users

You can add unique users to the RMU. However, only one
administrator-level user is allowed, and it is automatically
given the user name admin.
Adding/Removing Users
Only the admin account can add or remove users.
To add or remove a user
Step 1
When prompted, log in as admin.
Step 2
Step 3
In the User Configuration area, do one of the

following:
If you are adding a user:

a. In the Management Action drop-down,
click Create User.
b. In Edit New, enter the new user name.
22 June 2004
4-17
c. In Password, enter the new users

password and then confirm it in Re-enter
Password.
If you are deleting a user:

a. In the Management Action drop-down,
click Delete User.
b. In Select One, select the user you want to
remove.
Step 4

in red).
Step 5
Enter the admin password and click Confirm to

Changing a Password
At any time, you can change your RMU password. If you are
the administrator, you can also change other users
passwords.
To change a password
Note
Only the admin
can modify
another users
password.
4-18
Operation
Step 1
Step 2
In the User Configuration area, select Change User

Password from the Management Action
drop-down.
Step 3
If not already selected, select the appropriate user

account from the Select One drop-down.
Step 4
In Password, enter the new users password and

then confirm it in Re-enter Password.
Step 5

in red).
Step 6

6-00054-02 Rev A
Configuring the Time and Date

You can configure the date and time for the RMU. The date
and time will be used in the RMU log file to report when
events occurred.
To configure the date and time
Step 1
Step 2
Enter the date and time in the Date and Time area.
Step 3

in red).
Step 4

Synchronizing with an NTP Server

Note
If using a time
server, the
Scalar 1000
synchronizes
with the RMU.
22 June 2004
You can connect the RMU to a network time (NTP) server to

automatically set the time.
To synchronize with an NTP server
Step 1
Step 2
In the Date and Time area, select ON from the

Synchronization with NTP Server drop-down
menu.
Step 3
In the NTP Server IP Address field, enter the IP

address of the NTP server.
Step 4
In the Timezone field, enter the time zone deviation

for the NTP server. To get a list of timezone offsets,
click list of timezones.
Step 5

in red).
Step 6

4-19
Updating Firmware
You can update firmware for the RMU. Before you update
firmware, you need to have the firmware file in a location that
is accessible from the RMU interface. Firmware updates can
be found on www.adic.com.
To update firmware
Note
Step 1
Click the Firmware tab.
Step 2
Select the firmware you would like to update.
Step 3
Click Browse and browse to the location of the

firmware update file.
Step 4
Click Update Firmware.
Downloading
firmware can take
several minutes.
The firmware updates. If the RMU was selected for

a firmware update, the RMU will reboot.
Viewing Diagnostic Files (Library and

RMU Logs)
From the RMU, you can view the diagnostic information
(logs) for the attached library and RMU. This information can
assist technical support personnel when diagnosing
problems.
To view diagnostic files
4-20
Operation
Step 1
Click the Diagnostics file tab.
Step 2
Select the file you would like to view. The available

options are:
Library Command Log - Provides an event

(command, errors, and so on) log for the
library.
Library Error Log - Same as the Library

Command Log.
RMU Support Log - Provides support logs for

the RMU.
RMU Error Log - Provides error logs for the

RMU.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Step 3
Click Retrieve selected file.

The file loads.
Step 4
Click Display File to view the file in a separate

browser window.
Using the Operator Panel (via the RMU)

The RMU provides access to the library by means of a virtual
Operator Panel.
To use the Operator Panel
Click the Operator panel tab.

A graphical representation of the Operator Panel appears.
You can click the softkeys and control the library the
same way that you would from the front of the library. For
more information on the Operator Panel, see Using the
Operator Panel on page 4-3.
Viewing Logs
You can view the most current entries in the library command
log without downloading the entire log file.
To view the log
Click the Logs tab.

The command log appears with the most recent entry at
the top of the list.
Getting Help
The RMU provides access to help for the following items:
22 June 2004
Contents - Provides a description of each of the tabs on

the RMU interface.
Documentation - Provides a link to the user

documentation for the library.
SNMP MIB - Provides information on the SNMP

MIB file. For more information, see Configuring SNMP on
page 4-16.
Support - Provides information on contacting technical

support.
4-21
Version - Provides the current revision level of the RMU

firmware.
To get help
Click on the item in the left pane of the RMU interface.

The information appears in a separate browser window.
4-22
Operation
6-00054-02 Rev A
5
Menus and
Commands
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Using the Operator Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Accessing the Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Special Characters or Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Help Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Operator Intervention Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Mode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Mode Parms Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Element Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Mixed-Media Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Reservations Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
System Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Element Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Logs Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Command Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Drive Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Drive State Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Media Info Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Commands Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Move Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Position to Elem Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Move Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Inventory Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Insert/Eject Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Insert Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Insert Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Eject Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Eject Clean Tape Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Expired Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
By Coordinate Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
By Volser Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Database Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Element Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Config Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Learn Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Manipulate Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Manipulate Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Target ID Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Parity Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Ports Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Host Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Trace Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Security Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Switching Security From Off to On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Switching Security From On to Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Changing the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Emulate Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
RMU Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Name Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
IP Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Cleaning Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
View Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Utils Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Screen Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Audio Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Time Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
5-2
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Date Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Update Microcode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Clean Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Unload Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Initialize Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
SCSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Start Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Diags Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
DI/DO Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
Loopback Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
Sensors Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Wrap Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
Locks Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Gripper Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Get/Put Storage Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
Get/Put Drives Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
Step Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Scanner Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Adjust Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Trigger Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Fiducial Test Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Accessor Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Move Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
Step Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
SelfTest Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
PowerSup Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
Teach Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Teach New Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Teach Current Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
SAC Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Demo Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Other Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
About Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
22 June 2004
5-3
5-4
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
5-
Overview
This chapter describes the Scalar 1000 menus and commands.
Note
The information
menus are not
dynamically
updated. To view
changes, reselect
the menu that
was changed.
The Operator Panel is a menu-driven interface that provides

library status and current operating parameters to the
Scalar 1000 Library.
Through this interface you may select, view, or change many
of the library parameters. See the Operator Panel directory
structure in Figure 5-1 on page 5-7.
Using the Operator Panel Menu

Use the Operator Panel push-buttons to access each menu or
menu option. All menus and their respective options are
grouped according to function.
Accessing the Menu

Proceed as follows to use the Operator Panel menu buttons to
select menu options:
Step 1
Press the
(Up arrow) button or the
(Down
arrow) button to scroll through the current
selection, or to move the cursor to a new option.
Step 2
Press the
selection.
Step 3
Press the
(Escape) button to return to the
previous option.
(Enter) button to activate your
Each time you press the Escape button, you will

move back one step in the menu tree. If you
continue to press Escape, you will return to the
Main Menu.
22 June 2004
Overview
5-5
Special Characters or Cursors

A menu option can be preceded or followed by one or more
of the following special characters or cursors:
When this character follows the option, the next
menu contains more options.
Note
If no special
character follows
the option, the
selected action
will commence
immediately.
...
When these characters follow the option, the next

menu requests or supplies information.
>
When this cursor precedes the option, the option is

available for selection. Press the
button to select
the option. Press the
button to view information
about the option. Press the
or
button to
select between the previous or next options.
<
When this cursor follows the option, you can scroll

predefined values with the
and
buttons for
the selected option.
When this cursor appears below the option, you can

scroll predefined values with the
and
buttons for the selected option.
Refer to the Using the Operator Panel on page 4-3 for detailed
information.
5-6
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Figure 5-1
22 June 2004
Operator Panel Directory Structure
Using the Operator Panel Menu
5-7
Help Button
Help is common to all menus, submenus, dialogs, and
screens. Using Help while the cursor (< or >) is at a desired
location, provides information about that entry.
To use Help proceed as follows:
Step 1
Press the
selection.
(Help) button to view help on a menu
The help text appears for the current selection.

Step 2
Press the
(Up arrow) button or the
(down
arrow) button to move between help continuation
screens.
Step 3
Press the
(Escape) button to return to the
previous selection.
Each time you press the Escape button, you will
move back one step in the menu tree. If you
continue to press Escape, you will return to the
Main Menu.
Operator Intervention Message

If an error condition causes an operator intervention message
to appear, refer to Table 7-2 Operator Intervention Messages
on page 7-23 and Table 7-3 Error Log Reporting on page 7-28.
5-8
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Main Menu
Path: Main Menu
Note
The
button
can always be
used to escape to
the previous
menu.
The Main Menu is the first available menu after the Main
screen. Refer to Using the Operator Panel on page 4-3 for
detailed Main Menu information. All subsequent menus and
options are selected from the Main Menu. See Figure 5-2.
> Mode...
Status
Commands
Database
Figure 5-2
Setup
Utils
Service
About...
Main Menu
Depending on your selection, you have the following options:
22 June 2004
Mode Dialog on page 5-10
Status Menu on page 5-12
Commands Menu on page 5-35
Database Menu on page 5-62
Setup Menu on page 5-71
Utils Menu on page 5-97
Service Menu on page 5-113
About Screen on page 5-148
Main Menu
5-9
Mode Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Mode Dialog
Use the Mode Dialog to change the library operating mode.

For example, you can set the library to Online or Offline.
See Figure 5-3.
Offline .......
Ready
>Online
Ready
Accept: N
Figure 5-3
Note
If Shutdown is
selected for the
Mode parameter,
Shutdown is
automatically
displayed for the
State parameter.
Mode Dialog
Parameter
Value
Mode
Online
Offline
Shutdown
State
Ready
Not Ready
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
When toggling between the Ready and Not Ready states,

the following two screens, refer to Figure 5-4 and
Figure 5-5 appear. When Shutdown is selected, the
Shutdown Screen appears. See Figure 5-6.
Changing state to:

>READY<
Figure 5-4
Ready Screen
Changing state to:

>NOT READY<
Figure 5-5
5-10
Menus and Commands
Not Ready Screen
6-00054-02 Rev A
The library can now

be rebooted.
Figure 5-6
Shutdown Screen
Table 5-1 details the state and mode descriptions available

under the Mode screen.
Table 5-1
State
Ready
Not Ready
Shutdown
22 June 2004
Operating State and Mode

Mode
Description
Online
The normal host controlling condition. Host commands are

processed.
Offline
The normal operator controlling condition. Operator

commands are processed. Most host commands are not
processed.
Online
Aisle power is not present. Host commands not involving the

Accessor are processed.
Offline
Aisle power is not present. Most operator and host commands

are not processed.
Shutdown
Properly shuts down the library. All commands issued by the

host are completed, and no other commands are accepted. The
RUM issues SNMP traps and then also shuts down. The
library (and RMU) must be power cycled to leave this state.
Mode Dialog
5-11
Status Menu
Path: Main Menu
Status Menu
Use the Status Menu to access views of your library

operating statistics. See Figure 5-7.
> Library
Drives
Figure 5-7
Status Menu
5-12
Menus and Commands
Library Submenu on page 5-13
Drives Submenu on page 5-30
6-00054-02 Rev A
Library Submenu
Path: Main Menu
Status Menu
Library Submenu
Use the Library Submenu to access SCSI, System, Element,

and Log files for viewing or printing history. See Figure 5-8.
> SCSI
System...
Element...
Logs
Figure 5-8
Library Submenu
SCSI Submenu
System Dialog on page 5-20
Element Dialog on page 5-22
Logs Submenu on page 5-26
SCSI Submenu
Path: Main Menu Status Menu
Submenu SCSI Submenu
Library
Use the SCSI Submenu to view different SCSI parameter. See

Figure 5-9.
> Mode Parms...

Reservations...
Figure 5-9
SCSI Submenu
Depending on your selection, one of the following appears:
22 June 2004
Mode Parms Dialog on page 5-14
Reservations Dialog on page 5-19
Status Menu
5-13
Mode Parms Dialog

Path: Main Menu Status Menu Library
Submenu SCSI Submenu Mode Parms Dialog
Use Mode Parms to view the current, default, or saved Mode
Parameter pages. For example, you can view an individual
element address or see if the library has Mixed-Media
Support enabled. See Figure 5-10 and refer to the Scalar 1000
SCSI Reference Manual for additional information about the
Scalar 1000 Mode Parameters.
Select Mode Parms:

ELEMENT ADDRESS <
and Type: CURRENT
Accept: N
Figure 5-10
Mode Parms Dialog

Parameter
Value
Mode Parms
Element Address
Mixed-Media
Parity
LCD
Type
Current
Default
Saved
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, one

of the response screens appears. Refer to Figure 5-11 on
page 5-15. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue
to display but no action is taken.
5-14
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Element Address
Use Element Address to check current, default, or saved
addresses of the Accessor, storage cell, I/E station, or tape
drives. See Figure 5-11.
Base
Base
Base
Base
MT
ST
IE
DT
Figure 5-11
:
:
:
:
00001
04096
00016
00256
Element Address Screen

Parameter
Value
Base MT
Current, default, or saved base

Accessor address
Base ST

Storage Cell address
Base IE

Insert/Eject station address
Base DT

tape drive address
Mixed-Media Support
Use Mixed-Media Support to see barcode processing or if
the read element, unique additional sense code qualifier, or
mixed mode is enabled.
When Mixed-Media Support is selected, the Mixed-Media
screen appears. See Figure 5-12.
MediaID
Ext RES
Ext ASCQ
Ext BC
Figure 5-12
22 June 2004
:N
:
:
:
Mixed: N
N
N
N
Mixed-Media Screen
Status Menu
5-15
Parameter
Value
Media ID
Yes indicates that the library is

processing barcode media
identifiers.
No indicates that the library is
not processing barcode media
identifiers. If the library is
NOT operating in Media ID
mode, the Extended RES,
Extended ASCQ, and
Extended barcode are not
applicable.
Ext RES
Yes indicates that Extended

Read Element Status is
enabled to show element and
media domains/types.
No indicates that Extended
Read Element Status is
disabled.
Ext ASCQ
Yes indicates that Vendor

Unique Additional Sense
Code Qualifiers are currently
enabled.
No indicates that Vendor
Unique Additional Sense
Qualifiers are currently
disabled.
Ext BC
Yes indicates that reported

barcode will include the media
type identifier.
No indicates that reported
barcode will not include the
media type identifier.
5-16
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Mixed
Yes indicates that the library is

operating in mixed mode and
allows for non-installed
devices which may be
addressable by the SCSI host.
No indicates that the library is
not operating in mixed mode
and all non-installed devices/
cells will NOT be addressable
by the SCSI host.
Parity
Use Parity to view the current, default, or saved parity.
This view also displays the retries that are allowed in each
selection. See Figure 5-13.
Parity : Yes
Retries: 001
Figure 5-13
Parity Screen
Parameter
Value
Parity
Yes indicates that current,

default, or saved SCSI parity is
enabled.
No indicates that current,
default, or saved SCSI parity is
is disabled.
Retries
22 June 2004
Indicates the current number

of transmission retries allowed
(000999) due to SCSI parity
errors
Status Menu
5-17
LCD
Use LCD to view current, default, or saved library security.
See Figure 5-14.
Security: Disabled
Line
: 1<
MAIN MENU
(default)
Figure 5-14
LCD Dialog
Parameter
Value
Security
Disabled indicates that library

security is currently disabled.
Enabled indicates that library
security is currently enabled.
5-18
Menus and Commands
Line
Indicates the currently

displayed text line (14).
Text
Corresponding line of main

menu text with up to
20 characters.
default
Displays which of the three

modes (current, default, or
saved) is being displayed.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Reservations Dialog
Submenu SCSI Submenu Reservations Dialog
Use the Reservations Dialog to view a specific element,
or the entire library. See Figure 5-15.
This reservation remains in effect until:
The initiator that made the reservation sends another

command with the same Reservation Identification
number (this supersedes any previous reservation).
The initiator that made the reservation sends a RELEASE

command.
A reset or a power-on of the library is performed.
Bus : 0 <
Host ID : 0
Reservation ID:
Any
Found : 0000
Accept: N
Figure 5-15
Reservation Dialog
Parameter
Value
Bus
Displays the SCSI Bus ID

number (01)
Host ID
Displays the Host ID number

(07)
Reservation ID
Displays the hosts reservation

identifier (0x000xFF, Any)
Found
The value of the Found

parameter in the Reservation
Dialog is supplied by the
library firmware and cannot be
changed.
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the

Response Dialog appears. See Figure 5-16 on page 5-20.
Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to display
but no action is taken.
22 June 2004
Status Menu
5-19
Bus: 0 <
Host ID : 0
ReservationID:
Any
Found : 0109
Accept : N
Figure 5-16
Response Dialog
Parameter
Value
Found
Indicates the number of

reserved elements which
match the Bus, Host ID, and
Reservation ID parameters.
Accept
Y to accept
N to reject
System Dialog
Submenu System Dialog
Library
Use the System Dialog to view library operating statistics.

For example, the number of installed cartridges, number of
free cells, or the number of Gets performed by the library.
See Figure 5-17.
Cartridges
Free cells
Total gets
Figure 5-17
5-20
Menus and Commands
: 0122
:0036
:00000137
[more]
System Dialog
6-00054-02 Rev A
Parameter
Value
Cartridges
Displays the number of

cartridges in the library:
(00000787 for -inch and
SDLT/DLT cartridges)
(00001181 for AIT cartridges)
(00000951 for LTO cartridges)
Free cells
Displays the number of free

storage cells:
(788 - for -inch and SDLT/
DLT)
(1182 for AIT cells)
(0951 for LTO cells)
Total gets
The total number of gets from

elements (00000000 - 99999999)
[more]
More information on the

Continuation Screen.
When [more] is selected, the Continuation Screen

appears. See Figure 5-18.
Moves
: 000013225
X meters: 000005187
Y meters: 000011148
[more]
Figure 5-18
22 June 2004
Continuation Screen
Parameter
Value
Moves
Total move media commands

that have been executed
X meters
Total meters traveled by the

Accessor in the horizontal
direction
Y meters
Total meters traveled by the

Accessor in the vertical
direction
[more]

Continuation Screen
Status Menu
5-21

Get retries :
Put retries :
Scan retries:
I/E closes :
Figure 5-19
000008
000010
000009
000050
Continuation Screen
Parameter
Value
Get retries
Total recovered get operations
Put retries
Total recovered put operations
Scan retries
Total recovered barcode scan

operations
I/E closes
Total times the I/E station has

been closed
Element Dialog
Submenu Elements Dialog
Library
Use the Element Dialog to display the barcode and source

of a cartridge at an element address. See Figure 5-20.
Enter Desired
Coord: S< 01 2 A 01
OR Element : 00000
Accept: N
Figure 5-20
5-22
Menus and Commands
Element Dialog
6-00054-02 Rev A
Parameter
Value
Coord
The first field indicates the

type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell).
The second field displays
module numbers that can be
modified if EMs are present (1
4).
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (14), drive
bay (12), or IE station number.
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (AE),
drive port (AB), or IE station
column.
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column.
(0112 for -inch and SDLT/
DLT coordinates)
(0114 for LTO coordinates)
(0118 for AIT coordinates)
Element
Displays the element number

that corresponds to the
coordinate parameter.
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Response Dialog appears. See Figure 5-21. Otherwise,
the changed parameters continue to display but no action
is taken.
Status: Full
BC : 0000000000000345
Source: 0100
Valid : Yes
[more]
Figure 5-21
22 June 2004
Response Dialog
Status Menu
5-23
Parameter
Value
Status
Full indicates that a cartridge

is present in the element
Empty indicates that a
cartridge is not present in the
element
BC
Indicates the barcode label as

found on the cartridge when
the Status indicates Full
Source
Indicates the original location

from which this cartridge
came
Valid
Yes indicates that the results

shown are based on an
inventory of the elements
No indicates that the results
shown are not based on an
inventory of the elements
[more]

Continuation Screen

Total Puts : 0000011

Put Retries: 0000000
Get Retries: 0000000
[more]
Figure 5-22
5-24
Menus and Commands
Continuation Screen
Parameter
Value
Total Puts
Indicates the total number of

puts (000000099999999) that
occurred at this element
Put Retries

put retries
(000000099999999) that
Get Retries

get retries
(000000099999999) that
6-00054-02 Rev A
[more]

Continuation Screen

Reserved
:
Reserve ID :
Reserved by:
Figure 5-23
Note
Continuation Screen
Parameter
Value
Reserved
Yes indicates the element is

reserved by a SCSI host.
When not
reserved, Reserve
ID and Reserved
by parameters are
not applicable.
22 June 2004
No
N/A
N/A
No indicates the element is not

reserved. When not reserved,
Reserve ID and Reserved by
parameters are not applicable
(N/A).
Reserve ID
Indicates the reserve ID.
Reserved by
Indicates the library port and

SCSI ID of the reserving host.
Status Menu
5-25
Logs Submenu
Submenu Logs Submenu
Library
Use the Logs Submenu to view command, or error log

history. See Figure 5-24.
> Command Log...

Error Log...
Drive Error Log...
Figure 5-24
Logs Submenu
Command Log Dialog
Error Log Dialog on page 5-28
Drive Error Log Dialog on page 5-30
Command Log Dialog

Submenu Logs Submenu Command Log Dialog
Use the Command Log Dialog to view a running history log
of library operations. A service representative retrieves this
data for problem analysis. See Figure 5-25.
11/10/99
18:25:24.88
SCSIDONE INQ : Status
good
Figure 5-25
5-26
Menus and Commands
Command Log Dialog
6-00054-02 Rev A
Press the
button to print the command log and
the response dialog is displayed. See Figure 5-26.
The system is about

to print the log to
the serial port!
Continue: N<
Figure 5-26
Response Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to print the log to the serial

port
N to not print the log to a serial
port
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value, the two

Response Screens appear. See Figure 5-27 and
Figure 5-28. Otherwise, the changed parameter
continues to display but no action is taken.
Note
These screens
may flash by
quickly.
Requested command is
now in progress...
Figure 5-27
Response Screen
now complete...
Figure 5-28
22 June 2004
Response Screen
Status Menu
5-27
Error Log Dialog

Submenu Logs Submenu Error Log Dialog
Use the Error Log Dialog to view a running history of errors
that have occurred. See Figure 5-29.
02/19/97
18:25:24.88
Type
:
SW Temp
Error
:
0X02040000
Modifier:
0X00000000
Figure 5-29
5-28
Menus and Commands
Error Log Dialog

Parameter
Value
Type
Indicates the type of error.

Record the error type in Error
Log Codes on page 7-28.
Error
Indicates the error identifier.

Record the error identifier in
Error Log Codes on page 7-28.
Modifier
Indicates the error modifier.

Record the error modifier in
Error Log Codes on page 7-28.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Press the
button to print the error log and the
Response Dialog appears. See Figure 5-30.
The system is about

to print the log to
the serial port!
Continue: N<
Figure 5-30
Response Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to print the log to the serial

port.
N to not print the log to a serial
port.
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value, the two

Figure 5-32.
Note
These screens
may flash by
quickly.
Otherwise, the changed parameter continues to display

now in progress...
Figure 5-31
Response Screen
now complete...
Figure 5-32
22 June 2004
Response Screen
Status Menu
5-29
Drive Error Log Dialog

Submenu Logs Submenu Drive Error Log Dialog
Use the Drive Error Log to view a history of drive error
conditions. See Figure 5-33.
Note
This command is
not yet available.
THIS FUNCTION IS NOT

YET AVAILABLE
Press Escape.
Figure 5-33
Drive Error Log Dialog
Drives Submenu
Submenu Drives Submenu
Library
Use the Drives Submenu to view drive, media, or firmware

information. See Figure 5-34.
> Drive State...

Media Info...
Figure 5-34
Drives Submenu
Depending on your selection, one of the following
displays will appear:
5-30
Menus and Commands
Drive State Dialog on page 5-31
Media Info Dialog on page 5-32
6-00054-02 Rev A
Drive State Dialog

Submenu Drives Submenu Drive State Dialog
Note
The library must
be offline.
Use the Drive State Dialog to view the current state of

the selected drive. See Figure 5-35.
Drive: 1200<
State: Loaded
Clean Required: No
[more]
Figure 5-35
Drive State Dialog

Parameter
Value
Drive
Indicates the element index of

the desired drive:
(0120001247 for all AIT,
SDLT/DLT and LTO drives)
(0120001215 for all -inch
drives)
State
Information supplied by the

library firmware. Displays the
condition of the drive:
(LOADED, UNLOADED,
LOADING, UNLOADING,
EJECTED, EMPTY, DRIVE
ERROR, UNKNOWN)
Note
The Continuation
Screen could take
several seconds
to return with the
information.
22 June 2004
Clean Required
Information supplied by the

library firmware. Displays Yes
or No to clean or not clean the
drive.
[more]

Continuation Screen
Status Menu
5-31

SN : RB0401AMC00273
Code
: 213
120
SCSI ID : 03
Figure 5-36
Continuation Screen
Parameter
Value
SN
Indicates the drive serial

number
Code
Indicates the current controller

and drive firmware level of the
drive
SCSI ID
Indicates the current SCSI ID

of the drive (0015)
Media Info Dialog

Submenu Drives Submenu Media Info Dialog
Use the Media Info Dialog to display media information in
loaded drive elements. See Figure 5-37.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: D 01< 1 A 01
OR Element: 01200
Accept: N
Figure 5-37
Element Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord
The first field displays the type

of cell (I for I/E Station, D for
Drive, S for Storage cell).
modified if EMs are present
(14).
5-32
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
The third field displays the

The fourth field displays the
column.
The fifth field displays the row
of the column.
DLT coordinates)
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Response Screen appears. See Figure 5-38. Otherwise,
is taken.
Type: 6GB DLTIII

Free: 00000000 KB
Write Protected : No
Mounts: 000016
Figure 5-38
22 June 2004
Response Screen
Status Menu
5-33
Parameter
Value
Type
Displays the type of drive

media:
(for SDLT/DLT: NO TAPE,
UNKNOWN, CLEAN TAPE,
TK50 R0, TK70 R0, 2.6Gb DLT
III, 6Gb DLT IV, 10Gb DLT III,
15Gb DLT IIIXT, 20Gb DLT IV,
35Gb DLTIV, 40Gb DLT IV,
SDLT I)
(for LTO: 100GB for LTO-1,
200GB for LTO-2)
(for AIT: UNKNOWN, AIT
WRITEABLE, AIT
PARTITIONED, CLEAN
TAPE, AIT MIC)
Free
Indicates the amount of free

space in B, KB, or MB
remaining on the drive media.
Write Protected
Yes indicates that the cartridge

is write protected.
No indicates that the cartridge
is not write protected.
Mounts
5-34
Menus and Commands
Indicates the number of times

the media has been mounted
into a drive.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Commands Menu
Path: Main Menu
Commands Menu
Use the Commands Menu to access commands that perform a

motion within the library. See Figure 5-39.
> Park
Move
Inventory...
Insert/Eject
Figure 5-39
Commands Menu
22 June 2004
Park on page 5-36
Move Submenu on page 5-36
Inventory Dialog on page 5-43
Insert/Eject Submenu on page 5-45
Commands Menu
5-35
Park
Path: Main Menu
Commands Menu
Park
Use Park to retract the gripper and return the Accessor to the
home position. The two Response Screens appear.
See Figure 5-40 and Figure 5-41.
now in progress ...
Figure 5-40
Response Screen
now complete.
Figure 5-41
Response Screen
Move Submenu
Path: Main Menu
Note
The Scalar 1000
must be Offline
and Ready to use
the commands
under the Move
Menu.
Commands Menu
Move Submenu
Use the Move Submenu to position the gripper or scanner, or

to move media. See Figure 5-42.
>Position to Elem...
Move Media...
Figure 5-42
Move Submenu
5-36
Menus and Commands
Position to Elem Dialog on page 5-37
Move Media Dialog on page 5-39
6-00054-02 Rev A
Position to Elem Dialog

Path: Main Menu Commands Menu Move
Submenu Position to Elem Dialog
Use the Position to Elem to move the Accessor in front of
a specific element. See Figure 5-43.
Enter TARGET
Coord: S< 01 2 A 01
OR Element : 00000
Accept: N
Figure 5-43
Position to Elem Dialog

Parameter
Value
Coord

4).
column.
of the column.
DLT coordinates)
22 June 2004
Element
Displays the element index

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Commands Menu
5-37
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, two

Figure 5-45. Otherwise, the changed parameters
continue to display but no action is taken.
now in progress ...
Figure 5-44
Response Screen
The Accessor positions itself in front of the specific
element.
now complete.
Figure 5-45
5-38
Menus and Commands
Response Screen
6-00054-02 Rev A
Move Media Dialog

Path: Main Menu Commands Menu
Submenu Move Media Dialog
Move
Use the Move Media Dialog to move cartridges between

elements without host intervention. See Figure 5-46.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: S< 02 1 A 01
OR Element: 00000
Accept : N
Figure 5-46
Move Media Dialog

Parameter
Value
Coord

4).
column.
of the column.
DLT coordinates)
22 June 2004
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Commands Menu
5-39
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Target

Menu appears. See Figure 5-47. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
Enter TARGET
Coord: I< 01 1 A 01
OR Element: 01182
Accept : N
Figure 5-47
Target Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord
The first field displays the type

of cell (I for I/E Station, D for
Drive, S for Storage cell).
(14).
The third field displays the
bay (12), or IE station
number.
The fourth field displays the
column
The fifth field displays the row
of the column.
(0112 for -inch and
SDLT/DLT coordinates)
5-40
Menus and Commands
Element

coordinate parameter
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
6-00054-02 Rev A

Response Screens appear. See Figure 5-48 on page 5-41
and Figure 5-49 on page 5-41. Otherwise, the changed
now in progress ...
Figure 5-48
Response Screen
The Accessor moves the cartridge between the selected
Source and Target elements.
now complete.
Figure 5-49
Response Screen
If a Move Media is attempted without an inventory, the
following screen appears. See Figure 5-50.
-=> WARNING <=The library may not

be inventoried.
Continue : N
Figure 5-50
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
N to return to the previous
menu
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter, the Warning

message is removed.
22 June 2004
Commands Menu
5-41
If the Partitioned flag is set the following screen appears.

See Figure 5-51.
-=> WARNING <=Moving tapes may

corrupt partitions.
Continue : N
Figure 5-51
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu

message is removed.
5-42
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Inventory Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Commands Menu
Inventory Dialog
Use the Inventory Dialog to inventory specific elements.

See Figure 5-52.
Starting Inventory
Coord: S 02 1< A 01
OR Element: 00000
Accept : N
Figure 5-52
Inventory Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord

4).
column.
of the column.
(0112 for -inch and
SDLT/DLT coordinates)
22 June 2004
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Commands Menu
5-43

Number of Elements Dialog appears. See Figure 5-53.
Number of Elements
to Inventory: 0100<
Accept: N
Figure 5-53
Number of Elements Dialog

Parameter
Value
Elements

elements to inventory
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Figure 5-55. Otherwise, the changed parameters
now in progress ...
Figure 5-54
Response Screen
The barcode scanner inventories the specified storage
cells.
now complete.
Found : 100
Figure 5-55
5-44
Menus and Commands
Response Screen
Parameter
Value
Found

cartridges detected
6-00054-02 Rev A
Insert/Eject Submenu
Path: Main Menu
Submenu
Note
Commands Menu
Insert/Eject
Use the Insert/Eject Submenu to insert or eject a clean

tape into or out of the library. See Figure 5-56.
Use this option to

insert or eject
cartridge(s)
without host
intervention.
> Insert
Insert Clean Tape...
Eject...
Eject Clean Tape
Figure 5-56
Insert/Eject Submenu
Insert Screen
Insert Clean Tape Dialog on page 5-47
Eject Dialog on page 5-52
Eject Clean Tape Submenu on page 5-55
Insert Screen
Insert Screen
Insert/Eject
Use Insert Screen to move all cartridges found in the

Insert/Eject stations to the first available empty storage cells.
See Figure 5-57. If there are cartridges in the Insert/Eject
station, the response screen appears. See Figure 5-57.
Insert in progress
Source: 1182
Target: 0000
Figure 5-57
Insert Screen
The Current Source and Target elements are updated.
See Figure 5-58 on page 5-46.
22 June 2004
Commands Menu
5-45
now complete.
Figure 5-58
Response Screen

be inventoried.
Continue : N
Figure 5-59
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu

message is removed.
If the Partitioned flag is set, the following screen appears.
See Figure 5-60.

corrupt partitions.
Continue : N
Figure 5-60
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu

message is removed.
5-46
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Insert Clean Tape Dialog

Insert/Eject
Use the Insert Clean Tape Dialog to move the selected

cleaning cartridge from the Insert/Eject station to the
designated empty storage cells. See Figure 5-63 on page 5-48.

be inventoried.
Continue : N
Figure 5-61
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu

message is removed.
See Figure 5-62.

corrupt partitions.
Continue : N
Figure 5-62
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu

message is removed.
22 June 2004
Commands Menu
5-47
Enter SOURCE
Coord: I 01< 1 A 01
OR Element: 01182
Accept: N
Figure 5-63

Parameter
Value
Coord

(14).
number.
column.
The fifth field indicates the
row of the column.
DLT coordinates)
Element
Indicates the Insert/Eject

station element number where
the insert operation starts.
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Insert

Range Dialog appears. See Figure 5-64. Otherwise, the
changed actions continue to display but no action is
taken.
5-48
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Insert Range:
01<
Accept : N
Figure 5-64
Insert Range Dialog

Parameter
Value
Insert Range

elements for the insert
operation (0112 for -inch,
SDLT/DLT, and LTO
elements)(0118 for AIT
elements)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Target

Dialog appears. See Figure 5-65. Otherwise, the changed
actions continue to display but no action is taken.
Enter TARGET
Coord: S 01 2< A 01
OR Element: 00000
Accept : N
Figure 5-65
Note
The starting
address is
indicated by the
Coordinate or
Element
parameter. If
several cleaning
tapes are
inserted, the
Coordinate or
Element is
specified for the
first empty cell in
a group of
consecutive
empty cells.
22 June 2004
Target Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord
The first field is the cell type

(I for I/E Station, D for Drive, S
for Storage cell).
4).
The third field is the storage
cell section (14), drive bay
(12), or IE station number.
Commands Menu
5-49

column.
row of the column.
DLT coordinates)
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Usage

Dialog appears. See Figure 5-66. If N is selected, the
changed parameters continue to display but no action is
taken.
Type:
SDLT
Current Usage: 000<
Maximum Usage: 000
Accept: N
Figure 5-66
Usage Dialog
Parameter
Value
Type:
Type of cleaning cartridge.

The library uses the installed
media type and drive type to
identify the type of cleaning
cartridge.
If the library identifies the
cleaning type, it automatically
displays on the control panel.
If there is more than one drive
type for the installed media
domain, then the user MUST
select the cleaning media type.
5-50
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
For example:
If DLT and SDLT drives are
installed in the library, the user
must select a DLT or SDLT
cleaning cartridge.
Listed below are media
domains and types:
Domain
Half
DLT
8 mm
LTO
Type
3480/90E
IBM 3590
Plasmon NCTP
DLT
SDLT
AIT
IBM LTO
Current Usage
The number of times the

cleaning cartridge has been
used (000511).
Maximum Usage
The maximum number of

allowable uses for the cleaning
cartridge (000511).
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Accessor moves the number of cleaning cartridges to the
designated range of storage cells. See Figure 5-67.
If N is selected, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
now complete.
Figure 5-67
22 June 2004
Response Screen
Commands Menu
5-51
Eject Dialog
Eject Dialog
Insert/Eject
Use the Eject Dialog to remove cartridges without

opening the service or access doors, or without host
intervention. The final destination is a slot in the Insert/Eject
station. See Figure 5-70 on page 5-53.

be inventoried.
Continue : N
Figure 5-68
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu

message is removed.
See Figure 5-69.

corrupt partitions.
Continue : N
Figure 5-69
5-52
Menus and Commands
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu
6-00054-02 Rev A

message is removed.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: S< 02 1 A 01
OR Element : 01182
Accept: N
Figure 5-70
Eject Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord

4).
column.
of the column.
DLT coordinates)
22 June 2004
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Commands Menu
5-53
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Eject

Screen appears. See Figure 5-71. Otherwise, the changed
Eject in progress
Source: 00000
Target: 1182
Figure 5-71
Eject Screen
The cartridge is ejected to the first available empty cell in
the Insert/Eject station. The Response Screen appears.
See Figure 5-72.
now complete.
Figure 5-72
5-54
Menus and Commands
Response Screen
6-00054-02 Rev A
Eject Clean Tape Submenu

Insert/Eject
Use the Eject Clean Tape Submenu to remove a cleaning

cartridge from the library. See Figure 5-73.
>Expired Tapes
By coordinate...
By VOLSER...
Figure 5-73
Expired Tapes
By Coordinate Dialog on page 5-57
By Volser Dialog on page 5-60
Expired Tapes
Path: Main Menu Commands Menu Insert/Eject
Eject Clean Tape Submenu Expired Tapes
Use the Expired Tapes to remove expired cleaning cartridges
from the library without opening the service or access door, or
without host intervention. This function searches the cleaning
tape database and ejects tapes to the Insert/Eject station if
available.

be inventoried.
Continue : N
Figure 5-74
22 June 2004
Warning Dialog
Commands Menu
5-55
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu

message is removed.
See Figure 5-75.

corrupt partitions.
Continue : N
Figure 5-75
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu

message is removed.
Eject in progress
Source: 0123
Target: 1182
Figure 5-76
Expired Tapes Screen
The current source and target elements are updated. After

completion, the response screen shows command complete.
now complete.
Figure 5-77
5-56
Menus and Commands
Response Screen
6-00054-02 Rev A
By Coordinate Dialog
Eject Clean Tape Submenu By Coordinate
Use the By Coordinate Dialog to remove a cleaning
cartridge without opening the service or access door, or
without host intervention. See Figure 5-80 on page 5-58.

be inventoried.
Continue : N
Figure 5-78
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu

message is removed.
See Figure 5-79.

corrupt partitions.
Continue : N
Figure 5-79
22 June 2004
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu
Commands Menu
5-57

message is removed.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: S 01 1< A 13
OR Element: 00000
Accept: N
Figure 5-80
Eject Clean Tape By Coordinate Dialog

Parameter
Value
Coord

(14).
number.
column.
row of the column.
DLT coordinates)
5-58
Menus and Commands
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
6-00054-02 Rev A
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Clean

Media Eject Screen appears. Otherwise, the changed
See Figure 5-81.
Eject in progress
Source : 00000
Target : 00788
Figure 5-81
Eject Clean Tape By Coordinate Screen

See Figure 5-82.
now complete.
Figure 5-82
22 June 2004
Response Screen
Commands Menu
5-59
By Volser Dialog
Eject Clean Tape Submenu By VOLSER
Use the By VOLSER to remove cleaning cartridges from the
library without opening the service or access door, or without
host intervention, when the cartridge is not expired or the
coordinate is not known to the user. See Figure 5-83. This
function only displays cartridges that can be physically
ejected from the library.
BC: 20018
Status: Valid
Count: 009
IE: OK
Index: 001<
Eject: N
Figure 5-83
By VOLSER Dialog
Parameter
Value
BC
This field displays the cleaning

cartridge VOLSER. This is the
barcode label that is present on
the cartridge.
Status
Expired This cleaning

cartridge has expired.
Valid The cleaning cartridge is
configured and usable.
In Progress The cleaning
cartridge is configured and a
cleaning operation is currently
in progress.
Count
This is the number of clean

cycles the cartridge can be
used before it is expired.
IE
OK The Insert/Eject station

has available empty slots to
eject this cartridge.
FULL The Insert/Eject station
is full. To eject cartridges the
operator must remove
cartridges from the Insert/
Eject station.
5-60
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
N/A There are no Insert/Eject

cells available. The operator
must remove a magazine of
another type of media from the
Insert/Eject station. Insert an
empty magazine of the correct
media type to eject this
cleaning cartridge.
Index
Shows the current database

index (1 - 128)
Eject
Y Eject this cleaning cartridge

N Do not eject this cleaning
cartridge
- The operator cannot eject this
media because the IE station is
full, no magazine of the correct
media type is installed in the IE
Station, or a cleaning operation
is in progress.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Clean

Media Eject Screen appears. Otherwise, the changed
See Figure 5-84.
Eject in progress
Source : 00000
Target : 00788
Figure 5-84
Eject Clean Tape By VOLSER Screen

See Figure 5-85.
now complete.
Figure 5-85
22 June 2004
Response Screen
Commands Menu
5-61
Database Menu
Path: Main Menu
Database Menu
Use the Database Menu to access information about the

type of media, elements, or configuration of your library.
See Figure 5-86.
> Media...
Element...
Config...
Advanced
Figure 5-86
Database Menu
5-62
Menus and Commands
Media Dialog on page 5-63
Element Dialog on page 5-64
Config Dialog on page 5-67
Advanced Dialog on page 5-69
6-00054-02 Rev A
Media Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Database Menu
Media Dialog
Use the Media Dialog to obtain information about a specific

cartridge based on the barcode label.
In default mode, six characters are required.
In media ID mode, seven or eight characters are required.
In extended mode, five characters are required. However,

up to 16 characters may be entered.
Figure 5-87 shows the Media Dialog.
Enter volume label:<

AAAAAA
Accept : N
Figure 5-87
Note
If in extended
mode, the space
value (^) erases
the remaining
values.
Media Dialog
Parameter
Value
AAAAA
Indicates the volume label

(AZ, 09, ^)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.

Response Screen, refer to Figure 5-88, appears.
BC : 000389
Type
: 3590
Home
: 0060
Current: 0060
Figure 5-88
22 June 2004
Response Screen
Parameter
Value
BC
Indicates the value specified in

the Media Dialog.
Database Menu
5-63
Type
Indicates the cartridge media

type (SDLT I, DLTIII,
DLTIIIXT, DLT IV, 3480,
3490E, 3590, 3590 DL, NCTP,
AIT, LTO1, LTO2).
Home
Indicates the home location of

the cartridge.
Current
Indicates the current location

of the cartridge.
Element Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Database Menu
Element Dialog
Use the Element Dialog to select specific element

information from the database. See Figure 5-89.
Enter Desired
Coord: I 01 1 A< 12
OR Element: 01193
Accept: N
Figure 5-89
Element Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord

(14).
number.
column.
5-64
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A

of the column.
DLT coordinates)
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

the changed actions continue to display but no action is
taken.
Type
: DLT IE
Coord : I 01 1 A 12
Address : 0027
Index : 1193 [more]
Figure 5-90
22 June 2004
Response Dialog
Parameter
Value
Type
Displays the element type

(3480 IE, SDLT/DLT IE,
MIXED IE, AIT IE, LTO IE,
3480 STOR, DLT STOR, AIT
STOR, LTO STOR, 3480
DRIVE, 3590 DRIVE, NCTP
DRIVE, DLT4 DRIVE, SDLT
220, SDLT 320, DRIVE, DLT7
DRIVE,
AIT DRIVE, LTO 1 DRIVE,
LTO 2 DRIVE).
Coord
Displays the element

coordinate location.
Address
Displays the current SCSI

element address.
Index
Displays the database element

index.
Database Menu
5-65
[more]
More selections on the

Continuation Menu.

X position: 0047.3
Y position: 0956.4
Z position: 120
Figure 5-91
5-66
Menus and Commands
Configuration Screen
Parameter
Value
X position
Indicates the horizontal

coordinate in millimeters.
Y position
Indicates the vertical

coordinate in millimeters.
Z position
Indicates the depth

coordinate.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Config Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Database Menu
Config Dialog
Use the Config Dialog to view the current library

configuration. See Figure 5-92.
Serial#:
Frames :
Cells :
Drives :
Figure 5-92
Note
If the Operator
suspects a library
configuration
problem, use the
Teach New
option. Refer to
Teach New Dialog
on page 5-138.
201100001
1
158
2
[more]
Config Dialog
Parameter
Value
Serial#
The serial number of the

library
Frames
The number of frames (14)
Cells
The number of storage cells

DLT cells)
(1950 for LTO cells)
(11181 for AIT cells)
Drives
The number of drives

(148 for -inch, SDLT/DLT
and LTO drives)
(248 for AIT drives)
[more]
22 June 2004

Continuation Screen
Database Menu
5-67

ISSSS
SSSSS
SSSSS
S3D2D
Figure 5-93
Continuation Screen
The screen is a graphical representation of the configuration

of the library.
5-68
Menus and Commands
Parameter
Value
ISSSS
Insert/Eject station (I) and

4 columns of Storage
Cells (S)
SSSSS
5 columns of Storage Cells

(S)
SSSSS
5 columns of Storage Cells

(S)
S3D2D
1 column of Storage Cells (S)

and the number (1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6) of drives (D) in each
column of the bottom drive
bay
6-00054-02 Rev A
Advanced Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Database Menu
Advanced Dialog
The Advanced Dialog functions are password protected

and reserved for use by Customer and Product Engineering
Services only. See Figure 5-94.
>Learn...
Manipulate Get...
Manipulate Put...
Figure 5-94
Advanced Dialog
Learn Dialog
Manipulate Get on page 5-70
Manipulate Put on page 5-70
Learn Dialog
Path: Main Menu Database Menu
Dialog Learn Dialog
Advanced
The Learn Dialog is password protected and is reserved for

Customer and Product Engineering Services only.
See Figure 5-95.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-95
22 June 2004
Learn Dialog
Parameter
Value
Password
Selects the password

(00009999)
Accept
Y to accept the changes

N to reject the changes
Database Menu
5-69
Manipulate Get
Dialog Manipulate Get
Advanced
The Manipulate Get is password protected and is reserved

for Customer and Product Engineering Services only.
See Figure 5-96.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-96
Manipulate Get
Parameter
Value
Password

(00009999)
Accept

Manipulate Put
Dialog Manipulate Put
Advanced
The Manipulate Put is password protected and is reserved

for Customer and Product Engineering Services only.
See Figure 5-97.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-97
5-70
Menus and Commands
Manipulate Put
Parameter
Value
Password

(00009999)
Accept

6-00054-02 Rev A
Setup Menu
Path: Main Menu
Setup Menu
Use the Setup Menu to change the physical or logical

operational characteristics of the Library. See Figure 5-98.
> Library
Drives...
Cleaning
Figure 5-98
Setup Menu
22 June 2004
Library Submenu on page 5-72
Drives Dialog on page 5-91
Cleaning Submenu on page 5-93
Setup Menu
5-71
Library Submenu
Path: Main Menu
Setup Menu
Library Submenu
Use the Library Submenu to change the library defaults.

See Figure 5-99.
> SCSI
Host...
Trace...
Security...
Figure 5-99
Media...
Emulate...
RMU
Advanced...
Library Submenu
Depending on your selection, you will have the following

options:
5-72
Menus and Commands
SCSI Submenu on page 5-73
Host Dialog on page 5-77
Trace Dialog on page 5-78
Security Dialog on page 5-79
Emulate Dialog on page 5-86
RMU Submenu on page 5-87
6-00054-02 Rev A
SCSI Submenu
Path: Main Menu Setup Menu
Submenu SCSI Submenu
Library
Use the SCSI Submenu to set the library SCSI ID and parity,
and to view the SCSI bus type. See Figure 5-100.
> Target ID...

Parity...
Ports...
Figure 5-100
SCSI Submenu
Depending on your selection, you will have the following

options:
22 June 2004
Target ID Dialog on page 5-74
Parity Dialog on page 5-75
Ports Dialog on page 5-76
Setup Menu
5-73
Target ID Dialog
Path: Main Menu Setup Menu Library
Submenu SCSI Submenu Target ID Dialog
Note
The Scalar 1000
defaults to SCSI
ID 6.
Use the Target ID Dialog to set the library SCSI ID.

Changes will not take effect until library power is cycled.
See Figure 5-101.
Target ID:
Bus 0:
Bus 1:
Figure 5-101
Next
Now
4<
4
4
4
Accept: N
Target ID Dialog
Parameter
Value
Bus 0: Next
Next indicates the SCSI ID

address that takes effect for
bus port 0 after power is cycled
(07).
Bus 0: Now
Now indicates the SCSI ID

address that is currently in
effect (07) for bus port 0.
Bus 1: Next

address that takes effect for
bus port 1 after power is cycled
(07).
Bus 1: Now
Now indicates the SCSI ID

address that is currently in
effect (07) for bus port 1.
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen

updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
5-74
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Parity Dialog
Submenu SCSI Submenu Parity Dialog
Use the Parity Dialog to set the SCSI bus parity.
Changes will not take effect until library power is cycled.
See Figure 5-102.
Next
Now
Yes<
Yes
001
001
Accept: N
Parity
Retries
Figure 5-102
Parity Dialog
Parameter
Value
Parity Next
YES to enable SCSI parity

NO to disable SCSI parity
Parity Now
If parity is disabled, the retries

parameter is ignored.
Retries Next
Sets the number of retries

(000255) allowed when a SCSI
parity error is detected.
Retries Now
Displays the current number of

retries (000255) allowed when
a SCSI parity error is detected.
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

22 June 2004
Setup Menu
5-75
Ports Dialog
Submenu SCSI Submenu Ports Dialog
Use the Ports Dialog to view the current SCSI bus type
and usage. See Figure 5-103.
INSTALLED
YES
NO
Bus 0:
Bus 1:
Figure 5-103
TYPE
HVD
-
Ports Screen
Parameter
Value
Bus 0 : INSTALLED YES indicates the port is

installed.
NO indicates the port is Not
installed.
Bus 0 : TYPE
HVD indicates the bus is high

voltage differential.
LVD indicates the bus is low
SE indicates the bus is single
ended.
Bus 1 : INSTALLED YES indicates the port is

installed.
NO indicates the port is Not
installed.
Bus 1 : TYPE
HVD indicates the bus is high

LVD indicates the bus is low
SE indicates the bus is single
ended.
5-76
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Host Dialog
Submenu Host Dialog
Library
Use the Host Dialog to view the type of host control and
partition state
See Figure 5-104.
Host type:
Partitioned:
SCSI<
N
Accept: N
Figure 5-104
Note
At present, only
SCSI control is
supported.
Host Dialog
Parameter
Value
Host type
SCSI indicates SCSI control.
Partitioned
The SCSI mode select

command sets or clears the
flag. It is displayed here for
information only. If set to Y,
the library will warn the
operator that moving media
within the library may corrupt
host application defined
partitions.
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

22 June 2004
Setup Menu
5-77
Trace Dialog
Submenu Trace Dialog
Library
Use the Trace Dialog to define and enable the serial

service port. See Figure 5-105.
Trace output
USE: NONE/RMU<
Accept: N
Figure 5-105
Note
Trace Dialog
Parameter
Value
USE
SERIAL indicates information

is returned via the serial port.
If the RMU is not

installed, this
option must be
set to SERIAL in
order to prevent a
SAC from being
posted.
NONE/RMU is the default to

allow the port to be used for
RMU communication.
VCONSOL is used for
development only.
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

5-78
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Security Dialog
Submenu Security Dialog
Library
Use the Security Dialog to change the Operator Panel

LCD Security mode or the password that protects it. The
Operator Panel can also be secured by the host. Whichever
method is used to secure the Operator Panel, it must be the
method used to release the security. See Figure 5-106.
Security Enabled: N<

Change password : N
Accept : N
Figure 5-106
Security Dialog
Switching Security From Off to On

Parameter
Value
Security Enabled
Y to enable LCD security

(N indicates that LCD security
is not enabled.)
Change password
Y if the password is to be
changed, refer to Changing the
Password on page 5-82.
N if the password is not to be
changed.
If no password has been set
since the library was rebooted,
the operator will be forced to
change the password. Refer
to Changing the Password on
page 5-82.
Accept
22 June 2004
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Setup Menu
5-79
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter and the security

parameter is enabled, the Password Dialog appears. See
Figure 5-107.
If N is selected for the Accept parameter, the changed
Enter password :
[0000]
^
Accept : N
Figure 5-107
Password Dialog
Parameter
Value
Password
Indicates the password

(00009999)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value and the

password is verified, the response screens appears. See
Figure 5-108.
Security is now ON.
Figure 5-108
5-80
Menus and Commands
Security is ON Screen
6-00054-02 Rev A
Switching Security From On to Off

Parameter
Value
Security Enabled
N to disable LCD security.

(Y indicates that LCD security
is enabled.)
Change Password
N indicates that the password

cannot be changed at this
point.
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter and the security

parameter is disabled, the Password Dialog appears.
See Figure 5-109.
Enter password :
[0000]
^
Accept : N
Figure 5-109
Password Dialog
Parameter
Value
Password
Indicates the password

(00009999)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value and the

password is verified, the response screen appears. See
Figure 5-110.
Security is now OFF.
Figure 5-110
22 June 2004
Security is OFF Screen
Setup Menu
5-81
Changing the Password

Parameter
Value
Security
If the Security is to be changed,

refer to Switching Security From
Off to On on page 5-79 or
Switching Security From On to
Off on page 5-81.
Password
Y to change LCD password

N to leave the LCD password
as it is
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter and the change

password parameter is enabled, the Change Password
Dialog appears. Otherwise, the changed parameters
Change Password
Old[0000] New[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-111
5-82
Menus and Commands
Change Password
Parameter
Value
Old
Indicates the password to be

changed (00009999).
New
Indicates what the password

will be changed to
(00009999).
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
6-00054-02 Rev A
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value and the old

password is verified, the password is changed and the
Changed Password Screen appears. See Figure 5-112. If
N is selected for the Accept parameter, the changed
The password has

been changed.
Figure 5-112
Password Changed
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value and the old

password is not verified, the Invalid Password Screen
You did not enter a

valid password.
Figure 5-113
22 June 2004
Invalid Password
Setup Menu
5-83
Media Dialog
Submenu Media Dialog
Library
Use the Media Dialog to control the settings for media

handling and reporting. The host software must support
mixed-media types if the library is operating in mixed mode.
See Figure 5-114.
For additional information, refer to the Scalar 1000 SCSI
Reference Manual.
Volser:
Add ID: Y
Extend: Y
Figure 5-114
Note
If the value of the
Volser parameter
is changed, an
inventory is
required.
Media ID<
Mixed: Y
ASCQ
Y
Accept: N
Media Dialog
Parameter
Value
Volser
MEDIA ID
Media Identifier support is
enabled. The library shall scan
barcode media identifiers.
This mode requires the use of
six- character barcodes with
one or two-character media
identifiers.
DEFAULT indicates that the
library supports six character
barcode labels, or media ID
mode labels that have an
additional seventh or eighth
media ID character. The
barcode is stored and reported
as a six-character barcode
(ignoring any media IDs).
EXTENDED indicates that
the library supports 5 to
16-character barcode labels,
which may indicate any
mixed-media IDs and/or
checksums.
5-84
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Note
Add ID
If Media ID is NOT
selected, Add ID,
Extend, and ASCQ
will be set to N.
Y indicates that the media

identifier is added to the front
of the barcode label for RES
and RVEA.
N indicates that the media
identifier is NOT added to the
front of the barcode label for
RES and RVEA.
Extend
Y indicates that extended

(Extend_RES) element
descriptor status is enabled.
N indicates that extended
element descriptor status is
disabled.
Note
Mixed
A Teach New defaults

to Mixed=Y when
more than one media
domain is found in the
library.
Auto-Teach will not
change this value
unless a configuration
change has been made,
and the library
performs a new teach.
When mixed-media is enabled,

the library presents all possible
I/E cell positions. Depending
on the magazine, some may be
presented as uninstalled
through SCSI, RES and RVEA.
For additional information, see
SCSI Element Addressing
(document 400122).
Y- mixed-media is enabled and
presents I/E gaps
N - collapses I/E gaps
ASCQ
Y - use vendor ASC/ASCQs

N - use standard SCSI-2 ASC/
ASCQs
Accept
Y - to accept changes
N - to reject changes

22 June 2004
Setup Menu
5-85
Emulate Dialog
Submenu Emulate Dialog
Library
Use the Emulate Dialog to change the library operating

mode. Different emulation modes cause the library to
respond to SCSI INQUIRY commands in a manner consistent
with the listed library emulation type. Changes will NOT take
effect until the library power is cycled. See Figure 5-115.
Select library type :

NATIVE <
Accept : N
Figure 5-115
Note
Refer to the
Scalar 1000 SCSI
Reference Manual
for all command
processing. Refer
to Associated
Documents on
page 1-4 for more
information.
5-86
Menus and Commands
Emulate Dialog
Parameter
Value
Library type
NATIVE
STK 9710
EXB 480
EMASS
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

6-00054-02 Rev A
RMU Submenu
Submenu RMU Submenu
Library
The Scalar 1000 is factory equipped with a Remote

Management Unit (RMU) which allows web-based library
management via the Ethernet port.
Use the RMU Submenu to set the initial values of the RMU
network parameters for remote access.
See Figure 5-116.
>Name...
IP...
Figure 5-116
RMU Submenu
Name Dialog
IP Dialog on page 5-88
Name Dialog
Submenu RMU Submenu Name Dialog
Use Name Dialog to define the host name for the RMU.
Name : webfoot3
Accept : N
Figure 5-117
22 June 2004
Name Dialog
Setup Menu
5-87
IP Dialog
Submenu RMU Submenu IP Dialog
Use the IP Dialog to set the IP, Subnet, and Gateway
network addresses for RMU library communication.
See Figure 5-118.
IP : 100<100.100.100
Sub: 255.255.255.255
Gat: 100.100.100.100
Accept: N
Figure 5-118
IP Dialog
Parameter
Value
IP
Indicates the IP address (four

sets of numbers 0255).
Sub
Indicates the Subnet address

(four sets of numbers 0255).
Gat
Indicates the Gateway (four

sets of numbers 0255).
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

5-88
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Advanced Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Setup Menu
Advanced Dialog
Use the Advanced Dialog to enable or disable the

automatic configuration, calibration, or cartridge scan when
the library power has been cycled. See Figure 5-119.
If Auto Inventory is disabled, the element status is not
known until the host issues an Initialize Element Status
command or an Inventory is performed via the Operator
Panel.
If Auto Inventory is enabled, an automatic cartridge
inventory is executed on each power cycle.
Any changes in the Operating Mode parameter value should
be made by authorized Service Personnel.
The default is set to 02.
Auto Teach
:
Y<
Auto Inventory:
Y
Operating Mode:
02
Accept: N
Figure 5-119
Advanced Dialog
Parameter
Value
Auto Teach
Y to enable Auto Teach for

automatic configuration and
calibration on each power
cycle
N to disable Auto Teach on
each power cycle
Auto Inventory
Y to enable Auto Inventory for

automatic cartridge scanning
inventory on each power cycle
N to disable Auto Inventory on
each power cycle
Operating Mode
0 to select no library initiated

UNLOAD command before a
move.
1 to select a three second delay
before a Get operation is
performed on a SDLT/DLT
drive after detecting that a tape
22 June 2004
Setup Menu
5-89
was ejected
2 to allow the Scalar 1000 to
issue an UNLOAD command
to the Model 4001S, Model
7001S, Model 8001S, AIT3102,
AIT5002, AIT5102, AIT7002,
and NCTP drives before a
move if the cartridge is not
ejected by the host
3 to activate options 1 and 2
4 to disable automatic
cartridge recovery on PUT
failures
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

5-90
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Drives Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Setup Menu
Drives Dialog
Use the Drives Dialog to modify the SCSI ID for all drive
models except TD3610, 3590-B1A, 3590-E1A, Ultrium-TD1
(LTO-1), and Ultrium-TD2 (LTO-2).
See Figure 5-120.
Drive ID Override:
Enabled <
Set Drive ID:
N
Accept:
Figure 5-120
Drives Dialog
Parameter
Note
Drive ID
Override does
not work on LTO
drives..
Value
Drive ID Override Enabled allows the operator to

enable the setting of SCSI ID
for supported drives
Disabled prevents the library
from setting the SCSI ID for
supported drives
Set Drive ID
Y to view and set the drive

SCSI ID
N to not change the drive SCSI
ID
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Enabled is selected or was previously selected for the

Drive ID Override parameter and Y is selected for the Set
Drive Id and the Accept parameters, the SCSI ID Dialog
appears. Refer to Figure 5-121 on page 5-92.
If Drive ID Override is disabled and Y is selected for
Accept, the changed parameters continue to display but
no new screen action is displayed.
or
22 June 2004
Setup Menu
5-91
SCSI
ID
Next
Now
01
01
Accept: N
Drive
1200<
Figure 5-121
SCSI ID Dialog
Parameter
Value
Drive
Indicates the element index of

the drive
(0120001247 for SDLT/DLT,
and AIT)
Next

address that takes effect after
power is cycled (015).
Now
The SCSI ID address that is

currently in effect (015).
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

5-92
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Cleaning Submenu
Path: Main Menu
Setup Menu
Cleaning Submenu
Use the Cleaning Submenu to select how and when you

want to clean your drive. See Figure 5-99.
> Drives...
Media...
View...
Figure 5-122
Cleaning Submenu
Drives Dialog
View Dialog on page 5-96
Drives Dialog
Submenu Drives Dialog
Cleaning
Use the Drives Dialog to select automatic or scheduled

(specifying a time) cleaning for all tape drive models except
TD-3610, 3590-B1A, and 3590-E1A. See Figure 5-123.
AutoClean:
Schedule:
Hours: 00
Figure 5-123
Y<
Delayed
Min :00
Accept:: N
Drives Dialog
Parameter
Value
AutoClean
Y to enable automatic drive

cleaning
N to reject automatic drive
cleaning
22 June 2004
Setup Menu
5-93
Note
Schedule
If Immediate cleaning
is selected, no time
values can be entered.
Immediate to allow drive

cleaning when requested by
the drive.
Delayed to schedule drive
cleaning for requesting drives
at the specified time.
Hours
Hour (0023) that cleaning

should start.
Min
Minute (059) that cleaning

should start.
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Media Dialog
Submenu Media Dialog
Cleaning
Use the Media Dialog to specify the barcode number to

choose a cleaning tape of a specific media in the library.
See Figure 5-124.
A barcode mask is a valid, partial barcode label that can be
followed by a wildcard character (*). Barcode labels that
match the mask are marked as cleaning tapes. The barcode
mask must not match more than a maximum of 127 cleaning
tapes.
MediaType:
BC : AAAAAA
^
LTO
Continue: N
Figure 5-124
Media Dialog
Parameter
Value
Media Type
Selects one of the following

medium types:
3480/90E, 3590, NCTP,
DLT, SDLT, AIT, and IBM
LTO
5-94
Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
BC
Indicates the barcode mask of

the cleaning cartridge(s).
Searches the database for
cartridges that match the mask
you provide, and marks them
as cleaning cartridges.
You must select a barcode
mask that matches only
cleaning cartridges. If the
barcode mask matches other
than the cleaning cartridges,
later cleaning operations will
fail.
Continue
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value, the

Usage Dialog appears. Refer to Figure 5-125. Otherwise,
is taken.
Type:
Current Use:
Maximum Use:
Figure 5-125
LTO
000<
050
Accept: N
Usage Dialog
Parameter
Value
Type:
Type of cleaning cartridge.

Listed below are media
domain and types:
Domain
Half
DLT
Note
If the BC mask
selects more than
one cleaning tape,
the current and
maximum usage
parameter values
are applied to each
cleaning tape.
22 June 2004
8 mm
LTO
Current Usage
Type
3480/90E
IBM 3590
Plasmon NCTP
DLT
SDLT
AIT
IBM LTO
Specifies the number of times

the cleaning cartridge has been
used (000511).
Setup Menu
5-95
Maximum Usage
Specifies the number of times

the cleaning cartridge can be
used (000511).
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

View Dialog
Submenu View Dialog
Cleaning
Use the View Dialog to see how much a specific cleaning

tape has been used. See Figure 5-126.
BC: CLN001
Status: Reset
Max: 000 Count: 000
Index: 001<RESET: N
Figure 5-126
View Dialog
Parameter
Value
BC
Indicates the cleaning tape

barcode label.
Status
Expired indicates cleaning

tape has expired.
Missing indicates configured
cleaning tape is not present
within the library.
Valid indicates cleaning tape
is configured and is usable.
5-96
Menus and Commands
Max
Indicates the maximum

allowed usage count
(000511).
Count
Indicates the current usage

count.
Index
Indicates the current cleaning

tape database index.
6-00054-02 Rev A
RESET
Y to accept changes and purge

the barcode label from the
Cleaning database.
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Reset parameter value, the changed

parameter values are accepted. Otherwise, the changed
Utils Menu
Path: Main Menu
Utils Menu
Use the Utils Menu to perform library utilities. For example,

set screen controls or date and time. See Figure 5-127.
> Library
Drives
Figure 5-127
Utils Menu
Depending on your selection, you have one of the following

options:
Library Submenu
Drives Submenu on page 5-103
Library Submenu
Path: Main Menu
Utils Menu
Library Submenu
Use the Library Submenu to set your Operator Panel LCD

parameters, change passwords, enable the audio alarm, or set
the time and date. See Figure 5-128.
22 June 2004
> Screen...
Audio...
Dump
Time...
Date...
Figure 5-128
Library Menu
Utils Menu
5-97
Screen Dialog
Audio Dialog on page 5-100
Dump on page 5-101
Time Dialog on page 5-101
Date Dialog on page 5-102
Screen Dialog
Path: Main Menu Utils Menu
Submenu Screen Dialog
Library
Use the Screen Dialog to control the Operator Panel LCD

screen. See Figure 5-129.
Backlight Enable:
Use Screen Saver:
Y<
N
Accept: N
Figure 5-129
Screen Dialog
Parameter
Value
Backlight Enable
Y to enable LCD backlighting

N to disable LCD backlighting
Use Screen Saver
Y to enable the screen saver

N to disable the screen saver
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for Use Screen Saver and Accept

parameters, the Timeout Value Dialog appears. Refer to
Figure 5-130. Otherwise, the screen returns to the
Library Menu. Refer to Figure 5-128 on page 5-97.
Timeout Value
Password Enable
: 30<
: N
Accept: N
Figure 5-130
5-98
Menus and Commands
Timeout Value Dialog
6-00054-02 Rev A
Note
Password enable
can change from
Y to N only if a
password was
previously set.
Parameter
Value
Timeout Value
10 - 60 minutes (default = 30)
Password Enable
Y to enable a screen saver

password
N to disable a screen saver
password
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Password enable changes from N to Y or Y to N and

Accept changes to Y, the Password Dialog appears. See
Figure 5-131. Otherwise, the screen returns to the
Library Menu. Refer to Figure 5-128 on page 5-97.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-131
Password Dialog
Parameter
Value
Enter password

(00009999)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value while the

Password enable is set to Y, the password is changed. See
Figure 5-132.
The password has

been changed.
Figure 5-132
22 June 2004
Password Change Dialog
Utils Menu
5-99
Otherwise, if Y is selected for the Accept parameter value

while the Password enable is set to N, the password
protection is removed. If the password is entered
incorrectly, the following Invalid Dialog appears. See
Figure 5-133.
You did not enter a

valid password
Figure 5-133
Invalid Password Dialog
Audio Dialog
Submenu Audio Dialog
Library
Use the Audio Dialog to enable or disable the audio alarm.

See Figure 5-134.
Audio Enabled
: Y<
Accept : N
Figure 5-134
Audio Dialog
Parameter
Value
Audio Enabled
Y to enable audio
N to disable audio
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

5-100 Menus and Commands
6-00054-02 Rev A
Dump
Path: Main Menu
Submenu Dump
Utils Menu
Library
This function is no longer operational.

The following Response Screen will be displayed.
See Figure 5-135.
The code dump is now

completed.
Figure 5-135
Response Screen
Time Dialog
Submenu Time Dialog
Library
Use the Time Dialog to set the library 24 hour time format.
See Figure 5-136.
The library does not automatically adjust for Daylight
Savings Time.
Hour
Min
Sec
: 18<
: 24
: 25
Accept: N
Figure 5-136
22 June 2004
Time Dialog
Parameter
Value
Hour
Indicates the hour of the day

(0023)
Min
Indicates the minute of the

hour (0059)
Sec
Indicates the second of the

minute (0059)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Utils Menu
5-101

Date Dialog
Submenu Date Dialog
Library
Use the Date Dialog to set the library date.

See Figure 5-137.
Year : 00<
Month : 08
Day
: 16
Accept: N
Figure 5-137
Date Dialog
Parameter
Value
Year
Indicates the last two digits of

the year (0099)
Month
Indicates the two digits of the

month (0112)
Day
Indicates the two digits of the

day (0131)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

6-00054-02 Rev A
Drives Submenu
Path: Main Menu
Utils Menu
Drives Submenu
Use the Drives Submenu to change drive status or

operations. See Figure 5-138.
The menu selection supports all drive models except for TD3610, 3590-B1A, and 3590-E1A.
> Update Microcode...

Clean Drives...
Unload Drives...
Initialize
Figure 5-138
Drives Submenu
22 June 2004
Update Microcode Dialog on page 5-104
Clean Drives Dialog on page 5-108
Unload Drives Dialog on page 5-110
Initialize Submenu on page 5-111
Utils Menu
5-103
Update Microcode Dialog

Path: Main Menu Utils Menu Drives
Submenu Update Microcode Dialog
Note
Perform an
Inventory before
updating drive
firmware. If you
do not perform
an inventory, the
library may
prompt you to
perform one.
Use the Update Microcode Dialog to initiate a drive

firmware update. See Figure 5-140.
Drive firmware is upgraded with a drive firmware tape. You
select an I/E or storage slot in which to store the firmware
tape, then select a target drive and a range of drives.
The library moves the firmware tape to each selected drive,
then back to the original storage slot. All other operations are
prohibited while the upgrade is in progress.
After selecting Update Microcode from the Drives
Submenu, one of the following dialogs display depending on
whether the library has been inventoried:
If the library has been Inventoried, the Update Microcode
Dialog displays. See Figure 5-140 on page 5-105.
If the library needs to be Inventoried, the Inventory
Warning message displays on the Operator Panel. See to
See Figure 5-139.
-=>Warning<=The library may not be

inventoried.
Continue : N
Figure 5-139
Inventory Warning
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter, the library

Inventories the tape drives and the Update Microcode
Dialog displays. See Figure 5-140 on page 5-105.
If N is selected for the continue parameter, the update
does not continue and the Drives Submenu displays. See
Figure 5-138 on page 5-103.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Enter SOURCE
Coord: I 01 1< A 12
OR Element: 01193
Accept : N
Figure 5-140
Update Microcode Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord

4).
column.
of the column.
DLT coordinates)
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Element Dialog appears. See Figure 5-141. Otherwise,
taken.
22 June 2004
Utils Menu
5-105
Enter TARGET
Coord: D 01 1< A 01
OR Element:01200
Accept : N
Figure 5-141
Element Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord

(14).
number.
column.
row of the column.
DLT coordinates)
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Drive

Range Dialog appears. See Figure 5-142. Otherwise, the
taken.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Drive Range: 01<
Accept: N
Figure 5-142
Drive Range Dialog
Parameter
Value
Drive Range
Indicates the number of drives

to receive the firmware
update. Drives are in order of
their element address.
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Response Screen appears. See Figure 5-143. Otherwise,
taken.
-UPDATE MICROCODECycle 1 of 3
Status: Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-143
Response Screen
Parameter
Value
Status
Running indicates that the

current command is in
progress.
Completed indicates the
firmware on all the drives in
the cycle has been updated.
Canceled indicates the cycle
has been canceled.
ERROR! indicates an error has
occurred.
Cancel
22 June 2004
Y to cancel the cycle

N to continue the cycle
Utils Menu
5-107
If Y is selected for the Cancel parameter, the cycle is

canceled and the Cancel parameter does not appear.
Clean Drives Dialog

Submenu Clean Drives Dialog
Use the Clean Drives Dialog to initiate a drive cleaning
operation. See Figure 5-144.
The library selects a drive cleaning tape from a library storage
slot and places it in the selected drive. When cleaning is
complete, the library returns the cleaning tape to the library
storage slot.
All other operations are prohibited while drive cleaning is in
progress.
Enter TARGET
Coord: D< 01 1 A 01
OR Element: 01200
Accept: N
Figure 5-144
Clean Drives Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord

(14).
number.
column.
6-00054-02 Rev A

of the column.
DLT coordinates)
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Progress Screen appears, see Figure 5-145, followed by
the Response Screen. See Figure 5-146. Otherwise, the
taken.
now in progress ...
Figure 5-145
Progress Screen
now complete.
Figure 5-146
22 June 2004
Response Screen
Utils Menu
5-109
Unload Drives Dialog

Submenu Unload Drives Dialog
Use the Unload Drives dialog to eject a tape from the
specified drive. See Figure 5-147.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: D 01< 1 A 01
OR Element: 01200
Accept: N
Figure 5-147
Unload Drives Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord

(14).
number.
column.
row of the column.
DLT coordinates)
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
6-00054-02 Rev A

Progress Screen appears, see Figure 5-148, followed by
the Response Screen, see Figure 5-149. Otherwise, the
taken.
now in progress ...
Figure 5-148
Progress Screen
now complete.
Figure 5-149
Response Screen
Initialize Submenu
Submenu Initialize Submenu
Use the Initialize Submenu to initiate communication
with all drives. See Figure 5-150.
> Communication
SCSI
Figure 5-150
Initialize Submenu
22 June 2004
Communication on page 5-112
SCSI on page 5-112
Utils Menu
5-111
Communication
Submenu Initialize Submenu Communication
Use Communication to initiate communication tests to the
drives and initialize the drive state of all tape drive models
except TD-3610, 3590-B1A, and 3590-E1A. See Figure 5-151
and Figure 5-152.
now in progress ...
Figure 5-151
Progress Screen
now complete.
Figure 5-152
Response Screen
SCSI
Submenu Initialize Submenu SCSI
Use SCSI to initialize your previously set SCSI IDs. See
Figure 5-153 and Figure 5-154.
now in progress ...
Figure 5-153
Progress Screen
6-00054-02 Rev A
now complete.
Figure 5-154
Response Screen
Service Menu
Path: Main Menu
Service Menu
Use the Service Menu to select library diagnostics or

exercisers. These options should only be used by trained
service representatives or administrators. See Figure 5-155.
> Start...
Diags
Teach
SAC...
Figure 5-155
Demo...
Advanced
Other...
Service Menu
22 June 2004
Start Dialog on page 5-114
Diags Submenu on page 5-116
Teach Submenu on page 5-138
SAC Dialog on page 5-143
Demo Dialog on page 5-143
Other Dialog on page 5-147
Service Menu
5-113
Start Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Service Menu
Start Dialog
Use the Start dialog to check and reset Preventative

Maintenance (PM) SAC codes. The dialog flow will be either
Start Dialog with No Errors or Start Dialog with Errors
(displays the last SAC Code). See Figure 5-156.
PM Due:
01/01/98
X Remain:
00500000
Y Remain:
000500000
Reset PM values? N<
Figure 5-156
Preventive Maintenance Due Dialog
Parameter
Value
PM Due
Date preventative
maintenance is due
X Remain
Distance remaining on the

X-direction until PM
Y Remain
Distance remaining on the

Y-distance until PM
Reset PM values
Y to reset PM values
N to keep PM values
If Y is selected for the Reset PM values parameter value,

the Confirm Change Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-157.
If N is selected, the Preventative Maintenance Due
dialog continues to display but no action is taken.
Confirm change?
Figure 5-157
N<
Confirm Change Dialog
6-00054-02 Rev A
Parameter
Value
Confirm change
Y to confirm reset of PM values

N to reject reset of PM values
If Y is selected for the Confirm Change parameter value,

the Preventative Maintenance Due dialog displays with
reset values.
If N is selected for the Confirm Change parameter value,
the Preventative Maintenance Due displays with values
unchanged.
When the Escape button is pressed, the flow continues
with either the Start Dialog with No Errors display
(Figure 5-158 on page 5-115) or the Start Dialog with
Errors display (Figure 5-159 on page 5-115).
This second option provides information for a service
call. The Service Action Code (SAC) is based on the
displayed error code. Refer to Service Action Codes on
page 7-3 for additional information. Refer to the Scalar
1000 Maintenance Manual for a course of action related
to the displayed SAC.
There are no more

SACs to report.
Figure 5-158
Start Dialog with No Errors
Found SAC at:

03/05/97
14:04:38.68
SAC : E1
Error: 0x02030204
Figure 5-159
22 June 2004
Start Dialog with Errors
Service Menu
5-115
Diags Submenu
Path: Main Menu
Note
Diagnostics are
grouped according
to functional areas.
Service Menu
Diags Submenu
Use the Diags Submenu to run library diagnostics.

See Figure 5-160.
> DI/DO
Gripper
Scanner
Accessor
Figure 5-160
SelfTest...
PowerSup...
Diags Submenu
DI/DO Submenu on page 5-117
Gripper Submenu on page 5-121
Scanner Submenu on page 5-130
Accessor Submenu on page 5-133
SelfTest Dialog on page 5-136
PowerSup Dialog on page 5-137
6-00054-02 Rev A
DI/DO Submenu
Path: Main Menu Service Menu
Submenu DI/DO Submenu
Diags
Use the (Digital Input/Digital Output) DI/DO Submenu to

perform system tests. See Figure 5-161.
> Loopback...
Sensors
Locks...
Figure 5-161
DI/DO Submenu
Loopback Dialog
Sensors Submenu on page 5-118
Locks Dialog on page 5-121
Loopback Dialog
Path: Main Menu Service Menu Diags
Submenu DI/DO Submenu Loopback Dialog
Use the Loopback Dialog to send test signals from the
main control card to other system cards and return.
See Figure 5-162.
Device: LMC
Number: 01
Results:
Accept: N
Figure 5-162
22 June 2004
Loopback Dialog
Parameter
Value
Device
Indicates the loopback tests to

run (LMC, LGR, LPN).
Number
Indicates which device

number should be tested. This
field is always set to 01 because
there is only one of each device
to be tested in the Scalar 1000.
Service Menu
5-117
Results
A blank indicates that no test

has been run.
Passed indicates that the
previous test executed
successfully.
Failed indicates that the
previous test did not execute
successfully.
Accept
Y to accept change
N to reject changes
Sensors Submenu
Submenu DI/DO Submenu Sensors
Use the Sensors Submenu to test the sensors in real-time.
See Figure 5-164.
> Wrap ...

Real Time ...
Figure 5-163
Sensors Submenu
Wrap Dialog on page 5-118
Real Time on page 5-120
Wrap Dialog
Submenu DI/DO Submenu Sensors Wrap
Use the Wrap Dialog to test the ability of the system to
report state changes. See Figure 5-164 on page 5-119.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Device:
ALL SENSORS
Results :
<
Accept: N
Figure 5-164
Wrap Dialog
Parameter
Value
Device
Indicates the list of sensors to

test (All, Gripper_Tach,
IE_Lock, Y_Home, X_Home,
Touch_Tip, Gripper_Open,
Retract_Complete, IE_Open).
Results
Blank indicates no test has

been run.
Passed indicates that the
previous test executed
successfully.
Failed indicates that the
previous test did not execute
successfully.
Accept
22 June 2004
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Service Menu
5-119
Real Time
Submenu DI/DO Submenu Sensors Real Time
Use Real Time to indicate the state changes of the sensors
in real time. See Figure 5-165.
GripTach=0
TouchTip=0
GripOpen=X
RetrComp=0
Figure 5-165
YHome=0
XHome=0
IELock=0
IEOpen=0
Real Time
Parameter
Value
GripTach
0 indicates an ON state.
1 indicates an OFF state.
TouchTip
0 indicates not touching.

1 indicates touching.
GripOpen
0 indicates closed.
1 indicates open.
X indicates not implemented.
RetrComp
0 indicates not retracted.

1 indicates retracted.
YHome
0 indicates not home.

1 indicates home.
XHome
0 indicates not home.

1 indicates home.
IELock
0 indicates not locked.

1 indicates locked.
IEOpen
0 indicates closed.
1 indicates open.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Locks Dialog
Submenu DI/DO Submenu Locks Dialog
Use the Locks Dialog to exercise the I/E station lock
without opening and closing the station. See Figure 5-166.
If media removal has been prevented by the host, the
I/E station should not be unlocked by this method.
Pressing Enter will

toggle the lock.
State : Unlocked
Figure 5-166
Locks Dialog
Parameter
Value
State
Locked indicates that the

Insert/Eject station is locked.
Unlocked indicates that the
Insert/Eject station is
unlocked.
Gripper Submenu
Submenu Gripper Submenu
Diags
Use the Gripper Submenu to select Get/Put actions for

storage or a drive. See Figure 5-167.
> Get/Put Storage...

Get/Put Drives...
Step...
Figure 5-167
Gripper Submenu
22 June 2004
Get/Put Storage Dialog on page 5-122
Get/Put Drives Dialog on page 5-125
Step Dialog on page 5-128
Service Menu
5-121
Get/Put Storage Dialog

Submenu Gripper Submenu Get/Put Storage
Dialog
Use the Get/Put Storage Dialog to start Get and Put of
all cartridges in a specified range. No element-to-element
movements take place. See Figure 5-168.
The gripper test will

get/put media
Cycles to run:
009<
[more]
Figure 5-168
Get/Put Storage Dialog
Parameter
Value
Cycles to run
Indicates the number of cycles

to run (1999)
[more]

Continuation Menu

Enter SOURCE
Coord: S 01< 2 A 01
OR Element: 00000
Accept: N
Figure 5-169
Continuation Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord

(14).
6-00054-02 Rev A

column.
of the column.
DLT coordinates)
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Number of Elements Dialog appears.
See Figure 5-170. Otherwise, the changed parameters
Number of Elements
to Get/Put :
0100
Accept : N
Figure 5-170
22 June 2004
Number of Elements Dialog
Parameter
Value
Get/Put
Selects the number of elements

where get/put operations are
applied (00001200)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Service Menu
5-123

Response Dialog appears. See Figure 5-171 on page
5-124. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
DIAGS GRIPPER TEST

Cycle : 006 of 009
Status: Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-171
Note
If the operation
stops, the Cancel
parameter no
longer displays.
Response Dialog
Parameter
Value
Cycle
The number of completed test

cycles of the requested cycles.
Status
Shows the status of the

indicated cycle (Running,
Completed, Error, Canceled).
Cancel
Y to cancel the test

N to continue running the test
If Y is selected for the Cancel parameter value, the test is

cancelled. Otherwise, the test continues.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Get/Put Drives Dialog

Submenu Gripper Submenu Get/Put Drives
Dialog
Use the Get/Put Drives dialog to start an existing GET
and PUT of all cartridges in a specified range to a specific
drive. See Figure 5-172.
The menu selection supports all tape drive models except
TD-3610, 3590-B1A, and 3590-E1A.
The gripper test will

get/put media
Cycles to run:
009<
[more]
Figure 5-172
Get/Put Drives Dialog
Parameter
Value
Cycles to run
Indicates the number of cycles

to run (1999).
[more]

Continuation Menu.
When [more] is selected, the Continuation Dialog

appears. See Figure 5-173 on page 5-125.
Enter SOURCE
Coordinate : D 01 1< A 01
OR Element : 01200
Accept : N
Figure 5-173
Continuation Dialog
Parameter
Value
Coord

4).
22 June 2004
Service Menu
5-125

number.
column.
row of the column.
DLT coordinates)
Element

Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Number of Drives Dialog appears. See Figure 5-174.
Number of Drives
to Get/Put :
0010<
Accept : N
Figure 5-174
Number of Drives Dialog
Parameter
Value
Get/Put
Selects the number of

elements where the Get/Put
operation is applied
(00000048 for all elements).
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
6-00054-02 Rev A

is taken.
DIAGS GRIPPER TEST

Cycle : 006 of 009
Status: Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-175
Note
If the operation
stops, the Cancel
parameter no
longer displays.
22 June 2004
Response Dialog
Parameter
Value
Cycle

Status

Cancel


Service Menu
5-127
Step Dialog
Submenu Gripper Submenu Step Dialog
Use Step to set low-level control of Gripper functions. The
function should be used by trained service personnel.
See Figure 5-176.
This test should be

used by trained
personnel ONLY!
Continue: N<
Figure 5-176
Step Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue the test

N to cancel the test

Response Screen appears. See Figure 5-177.
Media
Grip:
Reach:
Speed:
Figure 5-177
None<
OPEN
RETRACTED
NORMAL
Continuation Dialog
Parameter
Value
Media
LTO limits open/close range

for an LTO tape cartridge.
AIT limits open/close range
for an AIT tape cartridge.
DLT IIIXT limits open/close
range for a CompacTape IIIXT
tape cartridge.
DLT IV limits open/close
range for a CompacTape IV
tape cartridge.
DLT III limits open/close
6-00054-02 Rev A
range for a CompacTape III

tape cartridge.
SDLT limits open/close range
for an SDLT tape cartridge.
NCTP limits open/close range
for a half-inch tape cartridge.
3590_DL limits open/close
range for a half-inch tape
cartridge.
3590 limits open/close range
Grip
Open indicates the Gripper is

open.
Closed indicates the Gripper is
closed.
Reach
Retracted indicates the

Gripper is retracted.
Extended indicates the
Gripper is extended
Speed
Normal uses predefined

normal speed.
Slow uses predefined slow
speed.
22 June 2004
Service Menu
5-129
Scanner Submenu
Submenu Scanner Submenu
Diags
Use the Scanner Submenu to adjust and test the barcode

scanner. See Figure 5-178.
> Adjust...
Trigger...
Fiducial Test...
Figure 5-178
Scanner Submenu
Depending on your selection, one of the following appears:
Adjust Dialog on page 5-130
Trigger Dialog on page 5-131
Fiducial Test Dialog on page 5-132
Adjust Dialog
Submenu Scanner Submenu Adjust Dialog
Use the Adjust Dialog to position the barcode scanner
beam over a specific location to adjust the beam. This function
should be used only by trained service personnel. See
Figure 5-179. Refer to the Scalar 1000 Maintenance Guide for the
step by step procedure to adjust the scanner.
DIAGS SCANNER ADJUST

Adjust scanner until
beam is level.
Y: 1005.0< X:0267.0
Figure 5-179
Adjust Dialog
Parameter
Value
Indicates the returned vertical

position value of the scanner
(it should be 1005.0 0.2).
6-00054-02 Rev A
Indicates the returned

horizontal position value of
the scanner (it should be 0267.0
0.2).
Press this button to select X or
Y.
Note
Do not use the up
or down arrows
to change gripper
positions because
scanner
adjustment will
be invalid.
Trigger Dialog
Submenu Scanner Submenu Trigger Dialog
Use the Trigger Dialog to trigger the barcode scanner to
read, decode, and display whichever barcode label is within
the range of the beam. See Figure 5-180.
SCANNER TRIGGER
Pressing Enter will
trigger scanner
BC :000389
Figure 5-180
22 June 2004
Trigger Dialog
Parameter
Value
BC
Returns the barcode label

information for the storage
cartridge.
Service Menu
5-131
Fiducial Test Dialog

Submenu Scanner Submenu Fiducial Test Dialog
Use the Fiducial Test dialog to test the scanner for
proper operation. See Figure 5-181.
Loops: 00 Test: 1
Xcnt: 000000
Ycnt: 000000
Continue: Y<
Figure 5-181
Fiducial Test Dialog
Parameter
Value
Loops
Displays how often the test has

been run.
Test
1 will read the first storage

fiducial and display the found
edge coordinates.
2 will read the Insert/Eject
Station fiducial and display
the found edge coordinates.
Xcnt
Displays the x edge position

count in tenths of a mm.
Ycnt
Displays the Y edge position

count in tenths of a mm.
Continue
Y to continue running the test

N to cancel the test.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Accessor Submenu
Submenu Accessor Submenu
Diags
Use the Accessor Submenu to move the Accessor in a

selected pattern. See Figure 5-182.
>Move...
Step...
Figure 5-182
Accessor Submenu
22 June 2004
Move Dialog on page 5-134
Step Dialog on page 5-135
Service Menu
5-133
Move Dialog
Submenu Accessor Submenu Move Dialog
Use the Move Dialog to move the Accessor in a figure eight
pattern without accessing cartridges. See Figure 5-183.
The accessor test

does corner moves.
Cycles to run:
009<
Accept: N
Figure 5-183
Move Dialog
Parameter
Value
Cycles to Run
Indicates the desired cycle

count (001999).
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Response Dialog appears. Refer to Figure 5-184.
DIAGS ACCESSOR TEST

Cycle : 006 of 009
Status: Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-184
Note
If the operation
stops, the Cancel
parameter no
longer displays.
Response Dialog
Parameter
Value
Cycle
Displays the number of

completed test cycles of
requested cycles.
Status
Displays the current cycle

(Running, Completed, Error,
Canceled).
Cancel


6-00054-02 Rev A
Step Dialog
Submenu Accessor Submenu Step Dialog
Use the Step Dialog to set Gripper low level control. This
function should only be used by trained service personnel.
See Figure 5-185.
This test should be

used by trained
personnel ONLY!
Continue: N<
Figure 5-185
Step Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue the test

N to cancel the test

Movement Dialog appears. See Figure 5-186.
Use Arrows to Move

X axis : 0539.0mm<
Y axis : 0000.0mm
Amount : 001.0mm
Figure 5-186
Note
Use the up or
down arrows to
change Amount
(step size) or
move gripper.
22 June 2004
Movement Dialog
Parameter
Value
X axis
Displays X axis location.
Y axis
Displays Y axis location.
Amount
Indicates move step distance

(1, 10100 mm).
Press this button to select X, Y,
or Amount.
Service Menu
5-135
SelfTest Dialog
Submenu SelfTest Dialog
Diags
Use the SelfTest Dialog to run a predetermined

sequence of diagnostics and exercisers. See Figure 5-187.
The selftest runs

a sequence of diags.
Cycles to run:
009<
Accept: N
Figure 5-187
SelfTest Dialog
Parameter
Value
Cycles to Run

count (001999).
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

is taken.
DIAGS SELF TEST

Cycle : 006 of 009
Status: Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-188
Response Dialog
Parameter
Value
Cycle

Status
Shows each test as it runs

(Loopback, Sensors, Lock,
Unlock, Open, Close, Extend,
Retract, Move, Scanner), then
displays the status of the
indicated cycle (Completed,
Error, Canceled).
Cancel

Note
If the operation
stops, the Cancel
parameter no
longer displays.
6-00054-02 Rev A

PowerSup Dialog
Submenu PowerSup Dialog
Diags
Use the PowerSup Dialog to display the installed dual

power supplies. See Figure 5-189.
This screen shows installed DC power supply status with
respect to AC input and DC output, indicating whether the
power supplies are functioning properly.
If dual power supplies are not installed, the Function Not
Available Screen appears. See Figure 5-190.
1.
1.
2.
2.
24V
48V
24V
48V
Figure 5-189
DC:
DC:
DC:
DC:
Y
Y
Y
Y
AC:
AC:
AC:
AC:
Y
Y
Y
Y
Power Supply Screen
This function is not yet

available. Press Escape
Figure 5-190
22 June 2004
Function Not Available Screen
Service Menu
5-137
Teach Submenu
Path: Main Menu
Service Menu
Teach Submenu
Use the Teach Submenu to reset and re-initialize the library

configuration. See Figure 5-191.
>Teach New...
Teach Current...
Figure 5-191
Teach Submenu
Teach New Dialog
Teach Current Dialog on page 5-140
Teach New Dialog

Submenu Teach New Dialog
Note
A successful
Teach New
operation clears
all cell statistics.
Caution
Teach
Use the Teach New Dialog to reset and re-initialize the

library configuration and calibration information. Before a the
teach operation begins, you are presented with the option to
save all learned offsets in the database. If a teach is performed
and is successful, all previous information is destroyed. An
inventory is required after the Teach New Dialog operation.
Refer to Figure 5-192.
Keeping learned offsets could damage your library. Only
trained service personnel should keep learned offsets.
A teach new will

clear and reset the
complete database.
Continue: N
Figure 5-192
Teach New Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue the teach new

menu
6-00054-02 Rev A
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value,

the Keep Learned Offsets Dialog (Figure 5-193 on page
5-139).
Learned offsets can

be preserved after
teach completes.
Keep offsets?: N
Figure 5-193
Keep Learned Offsets Dialog
Parameter
Value
Keep offsets?
Y to keep learned offsets

N to reject keeping learned
offsets. N is the default setting.
If Y is selected for the Keep offsets parameter value, the

Conformation Screen (Figure 5-194 on page 5-139)
appears.
If N is selected, the Progress Screen (Figure 5-195 on
page 5-140) appears followed by the Response Screen
(Figure 5-196 on page 5-140) or the error screen
(Figure 5-197 on page 5-140)
Keeping learned
offsets may cause
positioning errors.
Confirm: N
Figure 5-194
Caution
Confirmation Screen
Keeping learned offsets could damage your library. Only

trained service personnel should keep learned offsets.
Parameter
Value
Confirm
Y to confirm keeping learned

offsets
If Y is selected for the Confirm parameter value,

the Progress Screen (Figure 5-195 on page 5-140)
appears followed by the Response Screen
(Figure 5-196 on page 5-140) or the error screen
(Figure 5-197 on page 5-140).
22 June 2004
Service Menu
5-139
The requested teach

is in progress...
Figure 5-195
Progress Screen
The requested teach

completed OK.
Figure 5-196
Response Screen
Teach Failed:
<Diagnosis>
Original values
restored.
Figure 5-197
Error Screen
Teach Current Dialog

Path: Main Menu Service Menu Teach
Submenu Teach Current Dialog
Use the Current Dialog to re-calibrate the library
coordinate information. All previous configuration and
inventory information is retained. See Figure 5-198.
A teach current will

reset the positional
information only.
Continue: N
Figure 5-198
Teach Current Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue the teach current

menu
6-00054-02 Rev A
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value,

the Keep Learned Offsets Dialog (Figure 5-199 on page
5-141).
Learned offsets can

be preserved after
teach completes.
Keep offsets?: N
Figure 5-199
Keep Learned Offsets Dialog
Parameter
Value
Keep offsets?
Y to keep learned offsets

If Y is selected for the Keep offsets parameter value, the

Conformation Screen (Figure 5-200 on page 5-141)
appears.
If N is selected, the Progress Screen (Figure 5-201 on
page 5-142) appears.
Keeping learned
offsets may cause
positioning errors.
Confirm: N
Figure 5-200
Confirmation Screen
Parameter
Value
Confirm
Y to confirm keeping learned

offsets
If Y is selected for the Confirm parameter value,

the Starting and Ending Dialog (Figure 5-201 on page
5-142) appears.
22 June 2004
Service Menu
5-141
Starting Box: 01
Ending Box : 02
Accept: N
Figure 5-201
Starting and Ending Dialog
Parameter
Value
Starting Box
Indicates which frame to begin

the Teach Current operation
(14 depending on the number
of EMs).
Ending Box
Indicates which frame to end

the Teach Current operation
(14 depending on the number
of EMs).
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes

Progress Screen, refer to Figure 5-202 on page 5-142,
appears followed by the Response Screen, refer to Figure
5-203 on page 5-142.
The requested teach is

now in progress...
Figure 5-202
Progress Screen
The requested teach

completed OK.
Figure 5-203
Response Screen
6-00054-02 Rev A
SAC Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Service Menu
SAC Dialog
Use the SAC Dialog to see an explanation of the

displayed Service Action Code. See Figure 5-204.
Enter SAC to lookup:

SAC: E1
I/E station door is
not closed
Figure 5-204
SAC Dialog
For additional information on the SAC codes, refer

to Service Action Codes on page 7-3.
Demo Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Note
At least one storage
element for each
media type must
be empty for the
Demo option to
run.
Service Menu
Demo Dialog
Use the Demo Dialog to move cartridges from storage

element-to-storage element, but not to the tape drives. You
must enter the correct password to use this dialog.
See Figure 5-205 and Figure 5-206.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-205
Password Dialog
For demo, all media

will be moved.
Cycles to Run: 009<
Accept: N
Figure 5-206
22 June 2004
Demo Dialog
Parameter
Value
Cycles to Run

count (001020).
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Service Menu
5-143
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter, the Include

Drives Dialog appears. See Figure 5-207. Otherwise, the
changed parameters continue to display but no action is
taken.
Include drives: Y
Accept: Y
Figure 5-207
Include Drives Dialog
Parameter
Value
Include Drives
Y indicates that the drives will

be included in the cycling of
the cartridges.
N indicates that the drives will
not be included in the cycling
of the cartridges.
Accept


is taken.
Demo with Drives

Cycle :5 of 9
Status:Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-208
Response Dialog
Parameter
Value
Cycle

completed test cycles of the
requested cycles.
Status

Cancel

Note
If the operation
stops, the Cancel
parameter no
longer displays.
6-00054-02 Rev A


be inventoried.
Continue : N
Figure 5-209
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu

message is removed.
See Figure 5-210.

corrupt partitions.
Continue : N
Figure 5-210
Warning Dialog
Parameter
Value
Continue
Y to continue
menu

message is removed.
22 June 2004
Service Menu
5-145
Advanced Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Service Menu
Advanced Dialog
The options on the Advanced Dialog are used by product

engineering services and they are password protected. See
Figure 5-211.
> Status Change...

Drive Mounts...
Other Functions...
Figure 5-211
Advanced Dialog
After making a selection, the password dialog appears.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-212
Password Dialog
6-00054-02 Rev A
Other Dialog
Path: Main Menu
Service Menu
Other Dialog
Use the Other Dialog to change the Increase GDR and Soft
Accel settings for the library.
The Increase GDR setting indicates how many times the
scanner must read the same barcode label before it can report
a valid barcode number to the library. By default, the scanner
reads a barcode label once when performing an inventory,
which is indicated by an Increase GDR setting of N. To
increase the number of times a scanner reads a barcode label
from one to three times for an inventory, set the Increase GDR
setting to Y.
The Increase GDR setting is ignored in all modules that
contain 3590, 3480, or NCTP media and all libraries that use
the MEDIA ID mode. For libraries that contain AIT, DLT, and
LTO media, the Increase GDR setting can be set to Y. ADIC
recommends setting the Increase GDR to Y if you are using
AIT media in the DEFAULT or EXTENDED mode. For more
information on media modes, refer to Understanding Barcodes
on page 10.
The Soft Accel setting indicates how fast the Cartridge
Accessor accelerates and decelerates when moving along the
X-axis. By default, the Cartridge Accessor accelerates and
decelerates at a slow speed, which is indicated by a Soft Accel
setting of Y.
Increase GDR
Soft Accel
:
:
N<
Y<
Accept: N
Figure 5-213
Other Dialog
Parameter
Value
Increase GDR
Y indicates a GDR of 3 for

inventory.
N indicates a GDR of 1 for
inventory.
Soft Accel
22 June 2004
Y indicates that the Cartridge

Accessor accelerates and
decelerates at a low speed
when moving along the X-axis.
Service Menu
5-147
N indicates that the Cartridge

Accessor accelerates and
decelerates at a high speed
when moving along the X-axis.
Accept
Y to accept the changes.

N to reject the changes.

About Screen
Path: Main Menu
About Screen
The About Screen displays your library and RMU firmware

version (embedded software). See Figure 5-214 and
Figure 5-215.
FIRMWARE LEVEL
(c) Copyright 2001
Library 640A.XXXXX
RMU
160A
Figure 5-214
About Screen (RMU Connected)
FIRMWARE LEVEL
(c) Copyright 2001
Library 640A.XXXXX
RMU
Not Connected
Figure 5-215
About Screen (RMU Not Connected)
6-00054-02 Rev A
6
Processing
Media
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tape Cartridge Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Inspecting Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Handling Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Storing Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Acclimating Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Transporting Tape Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Inserting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Manually Inserting Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Ejecting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Manually Removing Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Understanding Barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Barcode Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Applying Barcode Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Barcode Label Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Cleaning Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Manual Clean without Library Cleaning Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Manual Clean with Library Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Immediate AutoClean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Library Delayed AutoClean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Host Controlled Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Enabling Library AutoClean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Using Cleaning Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Inserting a Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Ejecting a Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Declaring a Cleaning Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Viewing Cleaning Cartridge Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6-2
Processing Media
6-00054-02 Rev A
Overview
This chapter contains information about tape cartridge
maintenance, how to insert and eject media, barcode labels,
and how to clean media.
Tape Cartridge Maintenance

The library uses magnetic tape cartridge technology to collect,
backup, and archive data. Magnetic tape is made of flexible
plastic that is coated with ferromagnetic material on one side.
Simple care and handling will protect your cartridges.
Tape cartridges can survive years of use in a library
environment, but cartridges wear out over time. Worn media
can also cause damage to drives and potentially lead to a loss
of data. Refer to the media manufacturer's specifications for
tape cartridge life.
To reduce the chance of problems with your tape cartridges or
damage to your tape drive, follow these guidelines:
Inspecting Tape Cartridges below
Handling Tape Cartridges on page 4
Storing Tape Cartridges on page 4
Acclimating Tape Cartridges on page 5
Transporting Tape Cartridges on page 5
Inspecting Tape Cartridges

Before inserting new cartridges into the library, inspect them
for damage caused by shipping or mishandling. For specific
instructions about data recovery when media has been
damaged, refer to the drive or tape cartridge manufacturers
specifications.
Inspect tape cartridges in the following situations:
22 June 2004
If a cartridge has been dropped from a height greater than

three feet.
If the tape drive becomes inoperable after loading a tape

cartridge.
If the cartridge has been stored in a dusty environment

without a case.
Overview
6-3
Do not use the tape cartridges in the following situations:
If there is condensation in or on the cartridge.
If the cartridge has cracks or other physical damage.
If the cartridge casing is split at the seams.
If the leader pin is broken, loose, or dislodged from its

housing.
Handling Tape Cartridges

The Scalar 1000 provides extra I/E station magazines and
dust covers for handling and storing cartridges. The
magazines also allow for inserting and ejecting cartridges to
and from the library without library disruption.
Use the following tips when handling cartridges:
Remove dust on the outside of the cartridges with a damp

cloth.
Do not touch the tape leader.
Do not expose cartridges to moisture or direct sunlight.
Do not expose cartridges to magnetic fields.
Do not open the cartridge door unnecessarily because this

can expose the cartridge to contamination or physical
damage.
Do not drop cartridges or subject cartridges to physical

shock.
Storing Tape Cartridges

Use the following tips when storing cartridges:
6-4
Processing Media
While cartridges are not in the library, store them in either

their protective cases, the IE station magazines with dust
covers, or in individual protective cases.
The storage environment should not exceed temperature

and humidity requirements as described in the drive
manufacturer specifications.
When cartridges are stored in an extended archival

environment, always orient the cases so that the reel axis
is horizontal with the surface on which the cartridges are
stored. Use protective cases if storage containers are
accommodating.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Never stack cartridges in a stack of more than five.
Do not place cartridges on or near devices that may

produce magnetic fields such computer monitors or
motors. Such exposure can alter or erase data on the
cartridge.
Acclimating Tape Cartridges

When media is introduced to a new environment, the media
must acclimate to the new environment prior to being used.
Unpack media if in shipping containers and allow media

to acclimate to new environment for 24 hours in
protective cases.
Make sure that there is not any condensation in or on the

tape cartridge.
Make sure that the environmental temperature and

humidity is within levels specified per the tape drive
specifications.
Transporting Tape Cartridges

The following tips will help you move your tapes from one
location to another:
22 June 2004
If you are shipping tape cartridges, ship them in a jewel

case or equivalent.
Place cartridges in plastic wrap to protect them from

moisture, dust, and other contaminants.
When carrying cartridges or shipping them, always orient

the cases so that the reel axis is horizontal within the case
and shipping box.
Pack cartridges snugly so that the cartridges do not rattle

around.
Use a rigid box surrounded by adequate shock-absorbent

material.
Clearly mark the box with the proper orientation.
Tape Cartridge Maintenance
6-5
Inserting Media
Two methods of inserting storage cartridges into the library
are listed below:
Using the Insert/Eject Station on page 6
Manually Inserting Cartridges on page 7
Using the Insert/Eject Station

Using the Insert/Eject (I/E) Station to insert cartridges does
not disrupt library operations. The I/E Station contains two
cartridge magazines. To insert cartridges through the I/E
Station, follow this procedure.
Step 1
Pull on the handle of the I/E Station.

The I/E Station slides out.
Step 2
Remove the cartridge magazine.
Step 3
Insert the cartridge into the storage cell in the

cartridge magazine.
Step 4
Place the cartridge magazine into the I/E Station.
Step 5
Close the I/E Station.

The library locks the I/E Station. The Accessor scans the
cartridge magazine and the cartridge. The library
unlocks the I/E Station.
Step 6
Move the cartridge to the desired storage cell with

the SCSI MOVE MEDIUM command from the
host.
The Accessor moves the cartridge to the requested
storage cell location.
or
Issue the Insert command from the Operator Panel.
Refer to Insert Screen on page 5-45.
The Accessor moves the cartridge to the first available
storage cell location.
or
6-6
Processing Media
6-00054-02 Rev A
Issue the Move Media command from the Operator

Panel. Refer to Move Media Dialog on page 5-39.
The Accessor moves the cartridge to the requested storage
cell location.
Manually Inserting Cartridges

STATIC
SENSITIVE
There are two levels of access control. The first level is a

mechanical key lock. The second level is password protection
invoked by the host SCSI Mode Select command, LCD Page
Security option, or through the Operator Panel Security
option.
To manually insert media, follow this procedure.
If enabled, all locks must be disabled before the procedure
will succeed.
Step 1
If the password option is enabled, enter the

password.
Step 2
Use the Operator Panel to place the library

into the NOT READY state. Refer to Mode Dialog on
page 5-10.
The Accessor completes any current task and returns to
the home position.
Caution
22 June 2004
Step 3
Using the key, unlock and open the library door.
Step 4
Place the cartridge into the desired storage cell.
Step 5
Close and lock the door.
Step 6
Place the library in the READY state. Refer to Mode

Dialog on page 5-10.
Step 7
If the library does not perform an inventory within

one minute, execute a SCSI INITIALIZE
ELEMENT STATUS or a library Operator Panel
Inventory command.
Inserting Media
6-7
Ejecting Media
Removing media from the library is accomplished by using
the I/E Station. Alternately, the cartridge could be manually
removed from a specific storage cell location by the operator.
Using the Insert/Eject Station

Using the I/E Station to remove cartridges does not disrupt
library operations. To remove cartridges through the I/E
Station, follow this procedure.
Step 1
Issue a SCSI MOVE MEDIUM command from the

host with the source storage cell and the destination
I/E Station cell.
or
Execute the Eject command from the Operator
Panel. Refer to Eject Dialog on page 5-52.
The I/E Station is locked while the Accessor moves the
cartridge. After the move completes, the
I/E Station unlocks.
6-8
Processing Media
Step 2
Pull on the handle to open the I/E Station.
Step 3
Remove the cartridge magazine from the

I/E Station.
Step 4
Remove the cartridge from the storage cell.
Step 5
Replace the cartridge magazine into the

I/E Station.
Step 6
Close the I/E Station.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Manually Removing Cartridges

STATIC
SENSITIVE
There are two levels of access control. The first is a mechanical

lock which is manipulated by the key. The second is password
protection which is invoked by either the host SCSI Mode
Select command, LCD Page Security option, or through the
Security option on the Operator Panel.
To manually remove media, follow this procedure.
If locks are enabled, all locks must be disabled before the
procedure will successfully work.
Step 1
If the password option is enabled, enter the

password.
Step 2
Use the Operator Panel to place the library

into the NOT READY state. Refer to Mode Dialog on
page 5-10.
The Accessor completes any current task and returns to
the home position.
Caution
22 June 2004
Step 3
Using the key, unlock and open the library door.
Step 4
Remove the cartridge from the desired storage cell.
Step 5
Close and lock the door.
Step 6
Place the library in the READY state. Refer to Mode

Dialog on page 5-10.
Step 7
If the library does not perform an inventory within

one minute, execute a SCSI INITIALIZE
ELEMENT STATUS or a library Operator Panel
Inventory command.
Ejecting Media
6-9
Understanding Barcodes
Each tape cartridge in the Scalar 1000 must have an external
label that is operator and machine readable to identify the
barcode number. A barcode uses only uppercase letters A-Z
and/or numeric values 0-9. The Scalar 1000 supports Code 39
and Storage Technology type barcode labels.
Note
The six character AIT
barcode labels contain
a seventh character
checksum, which is
ignored in DEFAULT
media mode, is
reported as A in
MEDIA ID mode, and
interpreted as part of
the barcode in
EXTENDED mode.
6-10
Processing Media
There are three media modes:
EXTENDED - Labels may have 5 to 16 characters (media

identifiers and checksums have no special meaning)
DEFAULT - Labels may have six characters, or six

characters plus one or two media identifier characters.
MEDIA ID - Labels must have six characters and one or

two media identifier characters.
The -inch media identifier is a separate single character

barcode label that follows the six character label. All other
media identifiers are included with the six character VOLSER
on the same barcode label. See Table 6-1 on page 11.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 6-1
Barcode Label Characters

Reported to Hosta
Barcode
Mode
Media Type
Volser
Characters
Source
Media ID
Domain Media ID
Default
All
Not
required
See
below
1, D, or A
Extended
All
5 - 16
Part
of
volser
See
below
1, D, or A
Media ID
3480 (1/2)
3490E (1/2)
3590 (1/2)
NCTP (1/2)
CompactTape III
Engineered
Data
Products
1703-0C
CompactTape IV
Engineered
Data
Products
1703-0D
CompactTape IIIXT
Engineered
Data
Products
1703-0E
SDLT tape I
Engineered
Data
Products
3590DLc
(1/2)
Checksum
Checksum
AIT-3
Checksumb
LTO-1
L1
LTO-2
L2
AIT
AIT-2
(Tri-Code)
American
Eagle
Systems,
Inc.
or
(Tri-Optic)
Engineered
Data
Products
a. Reported to Host if Extended RES is enabled.

b. AIT cartridges have a checksum instead of a Media ID. The
library does NOT use checksum to verify the barcode.
c. DL = 3590 E1A
22 June 2004
6-11
Barcode Labels
For customers who want to print barcode labels, the labels
must meet the ANSI MH10.8M-1983 standard and other
additional requirements. The following list outlines the ANSI
MH10.8M-1983 standard and additional requirements:
ANSI MH10.8M-1983 Standard
Number of digits:
5 to 16 in extended mode
six (seven or eight including media ID characters)
in default and media ID mode
Background reflection: at least 25 percent
Print contrast: at least 75 percent
Ratio: at least 2.2
Module: 250 mm
Print tolerance: 57 mm
Additional requirements
Length of the rest zones: a minimum of 5 mm

No black marks can be present in the intermediate
spaces or rest zones.
No white areas may be present on the bars
A nine digit barcode must not match the serial
number of the extension modules nor the command
module (library serial number), otherwise it will be
ignored.
Each label should be applied in the upper right corner
of the tape cartridge recess (in the loaded orientation).
Quality Testing
Using the Operator Panel, select Main Menu Database

Config to get the library serial number. The Expansion
Module (EM) serial number can be read from the lower right
tab on the first storage section in each frame.
Compliance with these specifications can be checked and
documented with the Ergilaser 3000 High Density barcode
measuring device that is manufactured by the Laetus
Company.
6-12
Processing Media
6-00054-02 Rev A
If barcode scanning labels are purchased, the individual

media labels are supported if they are acquired from the
sources listed in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2
Supported Labels
Media
Model 8490
IBM 3590
NCTP
Label
Source
Tri-Code
American Eagle Systems, Inc.
Tri-Optic
Engineered Data Products
DLT-III

1703-0C
DLT-IV

1703-0D
DLT-IIIXT

1703-0E
SDLT
AIT Series (8 mm)
LTO
Applying Barcode Labels

All barcode labels are applied to the front of a cartridge.
Depending on the media type, barcode labels are either
stickers that adhere to the front of the cartridge or are cutouts
that slide into an indentation on the front of the cartridge.
See Figure 6-1 on page 14 for more information on applying a
barcode label.
Caution
22 June 2004
Do not place a barcode label on top of a cartridge. Placing a

barcode label on top of a cartridge can cause an inventory to
fail.
6-13
Do not place a barcode

label on top of a cartridge
Figure 6-1
Barcode Label Application (LTO example)
Barcode Label Restrictions

Note
Duplicate volsers are
not supported even
for different media
types.
6-14
Processing Media
The Scalar 1000 supports a range of media labels. With media

ID enabled, some additional restrictions apply.
The label types supported in media ID enabled and media ID
disabled are illustrated in Figure 6-2.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Apply the label so that

the characters are on top and
the barcode is on the bottom.
Figure 6-2
Barcode Label Examples
The numeric listing above each label type identifies the

restriction associated with the label.
1
22 June 2004
This is a six character Tri-Optic

forward printed label for a
half-inch cartridge. This label
can be used only when media
ID is disabled.
6-15
6-16
Processing Media

forward printed label with one
additional character media
identifier for a half-inch
cartridge. This label can be
used in both media ID enabled
and media ID disabled
applications.

forward printed label with one
additional character media
identifier for a half-inch
cartridge. This label can be
used in both media ID enabled
and media ID disabled
applications.
This is a six character Code 39

DLT cartridge. This label can
be used only when media ID is
disabled.
This is a six character Code 39

DLT cartridge. This label can
be used only when media ID is
disabled.
This is a seven character Code

39 backward printed label. The
embedded additional seventh
character identifies the DLT
cartridge media type. This
label can be used in both
media ID enabled and media
ID disabled applications.
This is a six character plus

checksum, forward printed
label for an AIT cartridge. This
label can be used in both
media IE enabled and media
ID disabled applications.
This is an eight character

forward printed label for an
LTO cartridge. This label can
be used in media ID mode and
with media ID disabled.
6-00054-02 Rev A
All labels are restricted to lengths of 5 to 16 characters in

extended mode, and 6 characters plus a media identifier in the
default and media ID modes. In default mode, the media
identifier is ignored by the library firmware. In media ID
mode, the media identifier is required.
The seventh or eighth character media identifier may be
separate from the barcode label, as in the case of -inch media,
or may be embedded in the barcode label, as in the case of
SDLT/DLT media.
The AIT barcode labels do not provide media identifier
characters but contain an embedded checksum character,
which will be disregarded by the library firmware in default
and media ID modes. In extended mode, the checksums and
media identifiers are reported as part of the barcode label.
22 June 2004
6-17
Cleaning Drives
Most tape drives use a cleaning tape for occasional cleaning.
Many cleaning tapes use a mild abrasive to clean the drives
read/write head and cleaning too frequently shortens the life
of the drive.
Note
It is suggested that
cleaning tapes have
white labels and the
first three letters for
the Volser number
are CLN.
If a drive still requests cleaning after it has been cleaned, a

drive cleaning failure message appears on the Operator Panel.
This message does NOT interfere with library operation but
simply notifies the operator to prevent cleaning tapes from
being used excessively by a bad drive. The library will not
clean the same drive twice in succession.
Note
A data tape may be
bad if it causes
several drives to
request cleaning.
The library reports a cleaning tape missing if it is removed

without using Eject Clean Tape.
Note
A library cleaning
tape is a tape that is
inserted into the
library using the
Insert Cleaning
Tape dialog, or was
identified to the
library with the
Setup Cleaning
Media dialog.
If this has accidentally been done, use the Operator Panel

(Setup Cleaning View) to record the Max and Count
numbers for future use and then Reset the entry. The Clean
Tape can stay out of the library or be re-introduced using the
Insert Cleaning Tape procedure.
There are five ways to clean the drives in a Scalar 1000:
Manual Clean without Library Cleaning Tapes
Manual Clean with Library Tapes on page 19
Immediate AutoClean on page 20
Library Delayed AutoClean on page 21
Host Controlled Cleaning on page 22
Manual Clean without Library Cleaning

Tapes
Note
You must supply a
cleaning tape, because
this cleaning
procedure does not
use a library cleaning
tape.
Use this manual cleaning procedure when the library is full

and the cleaning tape space is needed for data tapes.
You can also use this cleaning procedure when there is no
library-to-drive communication and the host application is
not cleaning the drives. You can physically look at each drive
to determine if it requires cleaning, then clean the drive.
After the drive Cleaning Required indicator lights, you
should wait no more than 24 hours for a low-activity time,
then proceed as follows:
Step 1
6-18
Processing Media
Direct the host to remove any tape from the drive

and suspend all library activity.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Step 2
Insert a good cleaning tape into the I/E station. Set

the library mode to Offline.
Step 3
Using the Operator Panel, go to the Move Media

screen (Main Menu Commands Move Move
Media) and select the I/E station as Source, and the
drive as Target. Move the cleaning tape to the drive.
When drive cleaning is complete, the drive will
eject the cleaning tape. After the tape is ejected, use
the Operator Panel to go to the Move Media screen
(Main Menu Commands Move Move Media)
and select the drive as the Source and the I/E as the
Target. Move the cleaning tape back to the I/E
station.
Step 4
Remove the cleaning tape, record its use, and set the
library mode to Online. The library is ready for the
host to take control and resume normal operation.
Manual Clean with Library Tapes

Note
Be aware that most
cleaning cartridges are
abrasive and burnish
the heads of the drive
they are cleaning.
Burnishing causes
wear on the tape drive
heads. Cleaning too
frequently can reduce
the life of a tape drive.
You must have at least one good cleaning tape entered into the
library before beginning this procedure. For further
information, refer to Inserting a Cleaning Cartridge on page 25
or Declaring a Cleaning Cartridge on page 27.
Use this procedure if all of the following are true:
Host application does not perform drive cleaning.
Host timeout for moves from the drives is too short to

include cleaning.
The host timeout for moves cannot be extended.
You do not want to use Delayed Auto Clean.
Advantage:
Of manual cleaning with library tapes over manual cleaning
without library tapes is:
Note
This procedure uses
the library cleaning
tapes. Tape use counts
will be updated in the
library database. There
must be library-todrive communication
to use this procedure.
22 June 2004
The library counts each time the cleaning tape is used.
You do not have to know where the cleaning tape is

located in the library or how many times it has been used.
You select the drive, the library automatically cleans the

drive and moves the tape back to its storage position.
Disadvantage:
Library storage slots are used for cleaning tapes. If you need
space in the library, use manual cleaning without library
tapes.
Cleaning Drives
6-19
After the drive Cleaning Required indicator illuminates, you

should wait no more than 24 hours for a low-activity time
then proceed as follows:
Step 1
Direct the host to remove any tape from the drive

and suspend all library activity.
Step 2
Set the library mode to Offline.
Step 3
Using the Operator Panel, go to the Clean Drives

screen (Main Menu Utils Drives Clean
Drives), and select the target drive. The library
selects a cleaning tape, inserts it into a drive, waits
until drive cleaning is complete, returns the
cleaning tape to its original location, increments the
usage counter, and displays the Requested
command is now complete message.
Step 4
Set the library mode to Online. The library is ready

for the host to take control and resume normal
operation.
Immediate AutoClean
Note
Be aware that most
they are cleaning.
Burnishing causes
heads. Cleaning too
You must have at least one good cleaning tape entered into
the library before beginning this procedure. For further
During a move from a drive to a storage location, a drive
reports to the library, that it requires cleaning. If AutoClean is
enabled, the library puts the cartridge it is moving into a
storage slot, but does not report to the host that the move is
complete. Instead, the library selects the cleaning tape and
inserts it into the drive.
After the cleaning process is complete, the cleaning tape is
ejected and moved back to storage, the use counter
increments, and the library reports to the host that the move
is complete.
Advantages:
You do not have to set the library offline to clean a drive.
Library operation is not interrupted by the cleaning
operation.
This procedure checks the drive after every unload and
automatically cleans the drive only when necessary.
6-20
Processing Media
6-00054-02 Rev A
Some host applications cannot tell when the drive requires

cleaning, so they implement cleaning by a load or mount
count (for example, after every 50 tape loads or mounts to the
drive).
If the load count is too small, it results in unneeded drive
cleaning which results in unnecessary head wear, which
shortens the life of the drive.
If the load count is too big, the drive may require cleaning but
not receive it. This results in dirty heads during read/ write
operations and possibly lost data.
Disadvantage:
This procedure extends the time to move media from a drive
to a storage position. Some drives can take more than 5
minutes to clean. If the host application cannot wait that long,
the move operation that contained the cleaning operation
fails.
Library storage slots are used for cleaning tapes. If you cannot
spare storage slots in the library then you should use manual
cleaning without library tapes.
Library Delayed AutoClean

Note
Be aware that most
they are cleaning.
Burnishing causes
heads. Cleaning too
You must have at least one good cleaning tape entered into the
library before beginning this procedure. For further
Use this procedure to clean your drives at a time of your
choice if all of the following are true:
Host application does not perform drive cleaning
Host timeout for moves from the drives is too short to

include cleaning
The host timeout for moves cannot be extended
At your preset time, the library checks the drive. If the drive
reports to the library that it requires cleaning, and AutoClean
is enabled, and the drive is empty, the library selects the
cleaning tape and inserts it into the drive.
After the cleaning process is complete, the tape is ejected,
moved back to storage, and the use counter is incremented.
Advantage:
Provides extended drive life because it prevents a weak tape
from being mistaken for a dirty drive and prevents cleaning
the drive too frequently. For additional information, refer to
Immediate AutoClean on page 20.
22 June 2004
Cleaning Drives
6-21
Host Controlled Cleaning

Use this procedure if host drive cleaning cannot be disabled.
The host application is responsible for defining, using, and
tracking cleaning tapes.
Library AutoClean must be disabled. The host must not share
the library controlled cleaning tapes because the library does
not track host-directed cleaning, and consequently, does not
increment the use counter.
Some host applications do not recognize the drive cleaning
request. They count the number of loads to determine when
to clean. For additional information, refer to Immediate
AutoClean on page 20.
6-22
Processing Media
6-00054-02 Rev A
Enabling Library AutoClean

The host should not share Scalar 1000 controlled cleaning
media. If a host uses the Scalar 1000 firmware controlled
cleaning media, the Scalar 1000 firmware will not update
cleaning media usage information.
Use this procedure to set autoclean. For further information,
refer to Drives Dialog on page 5-93.
Path: Setup Menu
Step 1
Cleaning Submenu
Follow the path and the Cleaning Submenu

>Drives...
Media...
View...
Figure 6-3
Cleaning Submenu
Step 2
Select Drives and the AutoClean dialog appears.

See Figure 6-4.
AutoClean:
Y<
Schedule: Delayed
Hours: 00Min :00
Accept:: N
Figure 6-4
Step 3
AutoClean Dialog
Select AutoClean, set the schedule (immediate or
delayed), Hours, Min (time to start the cleaning),
Accept.
Immediate - every dismount causes the firmware to
check for a cleaning request from the drive. If the
firmware receives a clean drive request, the drive is
cleaned immediately, and the tape move complete
response is delayed until the cleaning process is
complete.
22 June 2004
Enabling Library AutoClean
6-23
It is recommended that the host extend the timeout

period normally associated with waiting for a
dismount response.
Note
Use the Delayed
option for routine or
normal downtime
because the Scalar
1000 will go NOT
READY for the
duration of the
cleaning operation.
6-24
Processing Media
Delayed - sets the cleaning process time by setting

the Hours and Min option values.
6-00054-02 Rev A
Using Cleaning Cartridges

This section contains the following information:
Inserting a Cleaning Cartridge
Ejecting a Cleaning Cartridge on page 26
Declaring a Cleaning Cartridge on page 27
Viewing Cleaning Cartridge Status on page 28
Inserting a Cleaning Cartridge

Note
It is possible to
use the I/E
Station as storage
for cleaning
media but is not
recommended.
Path: Commands Menu Insert/Eject

Submenu Insert Clean Tape Dialog
For further information refer to Insert Clean Tape Dialog on
page 5-47.
Proceed as follows to move cleaning tapes into the library:
Step 1
Follow the path and the Insert Clean Tape Dialog

Enter SOURCE
Coord: I 01< 1 A 01
OR Element: 00001
Accept: N
Figure 6-5
Step 2
Enter the source Coord, Index, and Accept. The

Insert Range Dialog appears. See Figure 6-6.
Insert Range: 01<

Accept : N
Figure 6-6
22 June 2004
Range Dialog
6-25
Step 3
Enter the number of cells that may contain cleaning

tapes in the I/E station (Insert Range), and Accept.
See Figure 6-7.
Enter TARGET
Coord: S 01< 1 A 01
OR Element: 00001
Accept : N
Figure 6-7
Enter Target Dialog
Step 4
Note
If the tape type is
known to the library,
that type is displayed
on the Operator LCD,
if not, the type must
be selected.
Enter the Target Coord (the starting address of

enough consecutive empty storage cells to contain
all of the cleaning tapes in the specified I/E station
range), OR Element, and Accept.
See Figure 6-8.
Type:LTO
Current Usage: 000<
Maximum Usage: 050
Accept: N
Figure 6-8
Note
Current Dialog
Step 5
Maximum used:
SDLT/DLT = 20
LTO = 50
AIT = 35
Enter Current (how many times the cleaning tape

has been used), Max (how many times the cleaning
tape can be used before it must be ejected), Accept.
If several cleaning tapes are inserted, all get the
same usage setup. When the insert operation
completes the Command Complete Dialog
now complete.
Tapes inserted: 001
Figure 6-9
Command Complete Dialog
Ejecting a Cleaning Cartridge

You can eject a cleaning cartridge from the library three
different ways:
6-26
Processing Media
6-00054-02 Rev A
The Expired Tapes method. Refer to Expired Tapes on page

5-55 for more information.
The Coordinate Dialog method. Refer to By Coordinate

Dialog on page 5-57 for more information.
The Volser Dialog method. Refer to By Volser Dialog on

page 5-60 for more information.
Declaring a Cleaning Cartridge

Note
It is suggested that
cleaning tapes have
white labels and the
first three letters for
the Volser number
are CLN.
If a cleaning cartridge has been introduced into the library by

means other than Insert Cleaning Tape, use this menu to
inform the library that this tape is a Cleaning Tape. For further
information, refer to Media Dialog on page 5-94.
Path: Setup Menu Cleaning Submenu Media
Dialog
Step 1
Follow the path and the Media Dialog appears.

See Figure 6-10.
Media Type: LTO <

BC : AAAAAA
Continue: N
Figure 6-10
Media Dialog
Step 2
Enter the Media Type (DLT, SDLT, AIT, LTO, 3480/

90E, 3590, NCTP), BC (Barcode of cleaning tape you
want to declare. Use an * for ranges of barcodes).
See Figure 6-11.
Media Type: LTO <

BC : CLN001
Continue: N
Figure 6-11
22 June 2004
Selected Cleaning Tape
6-27
Step 3
Continue Y to accept the changes and the usage

dialog appears. See Figure 6-12.
Type:LTO
Current Use: 000<
Max Use: 050
Accept: N
Figure 6-12
Usage Dialog
Step 4
Enter Current Use (how many times the cleaning

tape has been used), Maximum Use (how many
times the cleaning tape can be used), and Accept.
Viewing Cleaning Cartridge Status

Check to see the status of your cleaning tapes. For further
information, refer to View Dialog on page 5-96.
Path: Setup Menu
Step 1
Cleaning Submenu
View Dialog
Follow the path and the View Dialog appears to

show you the BC number, Status (Reset, Expired, In
Progress, Missing, or Valid), Max (times you can
use the tape), Count (how many times the tape has
been used), Index (clean tape entry order), and
Reset (to change the Status to Reset).
See Figure 6-13.
BC: CLN001
Status: Reset
Max: 000 Count: 000
Index: 001<RESET: N
Figure 6-13
6-28
Processing Media
View Dialog
6-00054-02 Rev A
7
Error
Messages
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Service Action Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Operator Intervention Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Error Log Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7-2
Error Messages
6-00054-02 Rev A
7-
Overview
When a failure occurs, the Scalar 1000 firmware performs
error recovery and reporting. If the failure requires a service
call, Service Action Codes (SACs) are generated and posted to
the Operator Panel. When operator intervention is required, a
message is generated at the Operator Panel.
This chapter is organized as follows:
Service Action Codes
Operator Intervention Messages on page 7-23
Error Log Codes on page 7-28

Table 7-1 lists the SACs and the corresponding actions that
can be performed by an operator.
22 June 2004
Overview
7-3
Reboot the library to see if the problem goes away. If the

problem still exists, perform the actions listed for the SAC in
the order presented, starting with Action 1 and continuing
down the list until the problem is resolved or you are
instructed to call the ATAC.
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
01
SAC Reporting
Perform these actions
Type 1 library software errors including microcode and operating system

errors.
Action 1
To recover from the error, shutdown and restart the library by using the
Operator Panel (Main Menu Mode Dialog) or the Main Circuit Breaker
switch on the AC Power Compartment in the lower right corner at the back of
the CM. For more information, refer to Shutting Down the Scalar 1000 on page
4-9 and Starting the Scalar 1000 on page 4-7.
Note: Wait at least one minute between powering off and powering on the
library.
Action 2
If the problem is not corrected or persists, retrieve command and error log
information. Refer to Viewing Diagnostic Files (Library and RMU Logs) on page
4-20 for information on how to retrieve logs.
Action 3
Contact ATAC. Refer to ADIC Technical Assistance Center on page 1-5 for ATAC
contact information.
7-4
Error Messages
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
02
SAC Reporting (Continued)


errors.
Action 1
library.
Action 2
Action 3
03

errors.
Action 1
library.
Action 2
Action 3
22 June 2004
7-5
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
04


errors (the errors are not mapped).
Action 1
library.
Action 2
Action 3
05
A permanent library software error occurred.

Action 1
library.
Action 2
Action 3
7-6
Error Messages
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
10

Barcode scanner communications failed.

Action 1
library.
Action 2
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC. For contact
information, refer to ADIC Technical Assistance Center on page 1-5.
11
Barcode scanner communications is OK, data received from the Barcode

scanner is bad.
Action 1
Contact ATAC. For contact information, refer to ADIC Technical Assistance
Center on page 1-5.
12
Barcode scanner communication is OK, barcode scanner reports that data is

bad.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
13
Cannot read tape cartridge barcode label.

Action 1
Check the tape cartridge barcode label to ensure that it meets specifications and
is installed properly. Refer to Understanding Barcodes on page 10 for more
information. Look for the following:
A damaged or dirty label
Library not configured for correct media mode
Too few (less than 5) or too many (more than 16) characters on the barcode
label.
The cell in question is displayed with the SAC.
Action 2
22 June 2004
7-7
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
14

Cannot read the Serial Number label during a Teach operation.
Action 1
Check the Serial Number barcode label to make sure that it is installed properly
and not damaged or dirty. The Serial Number barcode label is located on the
lower right corner of the first 5x10, 5x12, or 5x15 Storage Assembly in the CM
(below the Teach Master barcode label). The Serial Number barcode label
contains a barcode and readable serial number. Example: 201100031.
Action 2
15
The Barcode scanner is not capable of fully supporting all different labels in
a Mixed-Media Library.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
20
Serial Port Connection failures.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
21
NVRAM failures.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
22
Failure to communicate with the Operator Panel.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
23
An unexpected interrupt is received.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
7-8
Error Messages
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
30

A fatal error is detected in SCSI Port 0.

Action 1
Verify that the library Port 0 is configured by using the Operator Panel.
(Main Menu Setup Library SCSI Ports). Verify that it is installed
and that the correct type is shown.
Action 2
31
A fatal error is detected in SCSI Port 1.

Action 1
Verify the Library SCSI Port 1 is properly configured by using the Operator
Panel. (Main Menu Setup Library SCSI Ports). Verify that it is
installed and that the correct type is shown.
Action 2
32
Wrong SCSI bus connection is detected.

Action 1
Verify that the Host SCSI bus is the same type (HVD, LVD, or SE) as the Library
SCSI Adapter card in Port 0 by using the Operator Panel.
(Main Menu Setup Library SCSI Ports)
Action 2
33
Wrong SCSI bus connection is detected.

Action 1
Verify that the Host SCSI bus is the same type (HVD, LVD, or SE) as the library
SCSI Adapter card in Port 1 by using the Operator Panel.
(Main Menu Setup Library SCSI Ports)
Action 2
22 June 2004
7-9
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
34

A general SCSI failure is detected.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
35
A fatal SCSI error is detected but the Port is unknown.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
39
An Ethernet Network error was detected by the Remote Management Unit

(RMU).
Action 1
Make sure the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the RMU and that you
have a valid link and activity LEDs illuminated on the Ethernet port.
Action 2
Verify that the network the RMU is connected to is working properly.
Action 3
40
The Library Aisle power cannot be enabled.

Action 1
Check that all front doors are closed and properly locked.
Action 2
41
The Library Aisle power cannot be disabled, failures are detected in the
Digital In/Digital Out (DI/DO) circuitries.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
42
A wrong library configuration is detected, the data reporting the number of

frames (modules) installed is different than expected.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
7-10
Error Messages
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
43

An unknown library configuration id detected, the barcode scanner is unable

to read the fiducial label located in the 4x12 (4x18 AIT) or the 5x12 (5x18 AIT)
Storage Assembly during a Teach operation. See Figure 2-2 on page 2-9 for
more information on Storage Assembly locations.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
44
An unknown fiducial label is detected during a Teach operation.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
45
During a Get or Put operation, the calculated X position exceeded the

allowable limits.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
46
During a Get or Put operation, the calculated Y position exceeded the

allowable limits.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
50
A tape cartridge is not properly seated in the storage cell.

Action 1
Make sure the tape cartridge in question is properly installed in its storage cell.
Action 2
Reteach the library using the Operator Panel.
(Main Menu Service Teach Teach New)
Action 3
22 June 2004
7-11
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
60

Cannot complete Lock/Unlock I/E station commands.

Action 1
Open and close the I/E Station and observe the I/E locked indicator on the
Operator Panel. The I/E lock LED should remain illuminated while the I/E
Station is locked. See Table 4-1 on page 4-5 for more information on the I/E
locked indicator.
Action 2
61
The Insert/Eject Station Door Closed Sensor error threshold is exceeded.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
70
Failures detected in the Gripper Assembly Finger Open operation.

Action 1
Perform a Teach Current operation (Main Menu
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 2
71
Failures detected in the Gripper Assembly Finger Close operation.

Action 1
Reboot the library. Refer to Shutting Down the Scalar 1000 on page 4-9 and
Starting the Scalar 1000 on page 4-7 for more information.
Action 2
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 3
7-12
Error Messages
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
72

A Get command is issued but the sensor indicated that a cartridge is already
present in the Gripper Assembly.
Action 1
Look into the Gripper Assembly and see if a cartridge is present.
Action 2
If a cartridge is found, perform the actions in SAC E0.
Action 3
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 4
If no cartridge is found in the Gripper Assembly, contact ATAC. For contact
73
Failures detected in the Gripper Assembly Touch Tip operation.

Action 1
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 2
74
A Get command is issued but the sensor indicated that the location is empty.
Action 1
Check the location (storage cell or drive) to see if a cartridge is present.
Action 2
If no cartridge is found in the location, perform the actions in SAC 02.
Action 3
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 4
If a cartridge is found, contact ATAC. For contact information, refer to ADIC
Technical Assistance Center on page 1-5.
22 June 2004
7-13
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
75

A failure is detected in the Gripper Assembly.

Action 1
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 2
76
A Teach failure is caused by the Accessor out of alignment condition.

Action 1
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 2
77
Failures detected in the Gripper Assembly during a Retract operation.

Action 1
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 2
7-14
Error Messages
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
78

A Put command is issued but the sensor indicated that the cartridge is not
present in the Gripper Assembly.
Action 1
Check the Gripper Assembly and see if a cartridge is present.
Action 2
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 3
Do one of the following:
If a cartridge is found, contact ATAC. For contact information, refer to ADIC
Technical Assistance Center on page 1-5.
If no cartridge is found in the Gripper Assembly, perform the actions in SAC
02.
79
Failures detected in putting a cartridge into a SDLT/DLT tape drive.

Action 1
Check the SDLT/DLT tape drive to ensure that it is powered on and working
properly. Refer to the SDLT/DLT Maintenance Guide for any SDLT/DLT drive
problem.
Action 2
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 3
7A
Failures detected in the Gripper Assembly Reach/Retract operations.

Action 1
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 2
22 June 2004
7-15
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
7B

Failure detected in a Teach Master operation. This failure is most likely to

occur when a Teach operation is executed as part of the Installation process
or during machine power up.
Action 1
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 2
7C
Failures detected in the Gripper Assembly Reach operation.

Action 1
Check for obstruction in the cell. Obstruction can be an unlabeled cartridge or a
cartridge in the cell during a Put operation.
Action 2
Current)
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 3
7D
Failures detected while getting a cartridge from the Tape Drive.

Action 1
Check for a tape in the tape drive and do one of the following:
If there is a tape cartridge in the tape drive, manually eject it, insert it in the
I/E Station, and retry the operation that failed.
If there is not a tape cartridge in the tape drive, continue with Action 2.
Action 2
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 3
7-16
Error Messages
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
7E

Failures detected while pushing a cartridge into a tape drive feed slot.
Action 1
Check the cartridge for any physical damage.
Action 2
Current).
Service
Teach
Teach
Action 3
If there is no physical damage to the cartridge, contact ATAC. For contact
80
Failures detected in the X-Axis Servo system.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
81
Failures detected in the Y-Axis Servo system.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
82
An unexpected Motors Control condition was received.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
83
The Locate Fiducial Command failed with no target found. This failure
happens most likely during an initial installation of the library.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
84
Y-Axis failed to reach target.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
22 June 2004
7-17
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
85

X-Axis failed to reach target.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
86
The first full speed move command issued when the Accessor is at home
position failed.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
87
The Accessor cannot move away from the X-Axis home position.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
88
The Accessor cannot move away from the Y-Axis home position.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
90
An LSC1 card was detected by the Library firmware when an LSC2 card is
required for this Library configuration to operate.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
91
An LMC1 card was detected by the Library firmware when an LMC3 card is
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
92
An LBI1 card was detected by the Library firmware when an LBI2 card is
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
7-18
Error Messages
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
93

A failure was detected in the drive communication hardware within the

Library. The Library cannot communicate with one or more tape drives (note
the physical location of the failing tape drive. This information is presented
with the SAC).
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
94
Communication was established between the Library and the tape drive but
the Library cannot determine the status of a particular tape drive.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
96
The Library detected a tape drive hardware failure.

Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
97
Firmware detected that the LGR card installed in the Library can not be used
with this level of firmware. One of the following conditions exist:
A new level of firmware is installed in a Library with an old-style gripper and
old style LGR card.
The library is upgraded to the new style gripper and LGR card but does not
have the latest level of firmware installed.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
A0
An error has been detected in the communication path between the Library
Controller and the RMU.
Action 1
Verify the Trace output is set to NONE/RMU (Main Menu
Setup Library Trace Dialog). Refer to Trace Dialog on page 5-78 for
more information.
Action 2
22 June 2004
7-19
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
D0

The Library detected that one of the DC Power supplies has failed. This error
condition only occurs in Libraries equipped with the Redundant DC Power
Supplies Feature.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
D1
The Library detected that AC input to one bank of the DC Power supplies is
missing. This error condition only occurs in Libraries equipped with the
Redundant DC Power Supplies Feature.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
F0
Failures were detected while running the diagnostic loop test from the LSC
card to the LMC card.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
F1
card to the LPN1 card.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
F2
card to the LGR card.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
F3
card to all sensors on the Gripper Assembly.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
7-20
Error Messages
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
F4

card to all sensors on the Insert/Eject Station.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
F5
card to the X-Axis home sensor.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
F6
card to the Y-Axis home sensor.
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
F7
Failures detected in the LSC card during Power On Self Test (POST).
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
F8
Failures detected in the LMC card during Power On Self Test (POST).
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
F9
Failures detected in the LGR card during Power On Self Test (POST).
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
FA
Failures detected in the LAM1 card during Power On Self Test (POST).
Action 1
Center on page 1-5.
22 June 2004
7-21
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
FB

Preventive Maintenance is required.

Action 1
Contact ATAC to schedule Preventive Maintenance. For contact information,
refer to ADIC Technical Assistance Center on page 1-5.
7-22
Error Messages
6-00054-02 Rev A
Operator Intervention Messages

Table 7-2 describes some of the operator intervention
messages. Each intervention message is composed of four
lines. The third and/or fourth lines may contain variable
information specific to the message. For SAC indications, refer
to Service Action Codes on page 7-3. For Code error modifiers,
refer to the Scalar 1000 Maintenance Guide.
Table 7-2
Message Lines
Alert not found.
Press Enter.
None
WARNING!
The accessor could
not be parked.
[OK]
None
WARNING!
Moving tapes may
corrupt partitions.
Continue: %X
%X = Y to continue
-=>ERROR!<=Initialization Error
Code: 0x%X
%X = 8 digits hex
error modifier
-=>PERM ERROR!<=CALL FOR SERVICE

SAC :%X
Code:0x%Y
%X = 2 digit hex
%Y = 8 digit hex
error modifier
-=>PERM ERROR!<=SYSTEM WILL REBOOT

SAC :%X
Code:0x%Y
%X = 2 digit hex
%Y = 8 digit hex
error modifier
->SYSTEM REBOOTED<NEW CODE LOADED

Version %XXXX.%YYYYY
->SYSTEM REBOOTED<RECOVERED FROM ERROR
SAC :%X
Code:0x%Y
22 June 2004
Variables
current version
%X = 4 digit major rev
%Y = 5 digit minor rev
%X = 2 digit hex
%Y = 8 digit hex
error modifier
7-23
Table 7-2
Operator Intervention Messages (Continued)
Message Lines
7-24
Error Messages
Variables
->SYSTEM REBOOTED<CALL FOR SERVICE

SAC :%X
Code:0x%Y
%X = 2 digit hex
%Y = 8 digit hex
error modifier
->TOO MANY ERRORS!<CALL FOR SERVICE

SAC :%X
Code:0x%Y
%X = 2 digit hex
%Y = 8 digit hex
error modifier
->ATTENTION!<PM SERVICE DUE

Please call to
schedule maintenance
None
INTERVENTION NEEDED!
Please open and
close the I/E station
door again.
None
Unexpected door open
detected. Check all
doors for closure.
None
Single-ended device
detected on diff.
SCSI bus port 0.
None
Single-ended device
detected on diff.
SCSI bus port 1.
None
Check SCSI bus port0
connector and/or
termination.
None
Check SCSI bus port1
connector and/or
termination.
None
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 7-2
Message Lines
Variables
Remove cartridge in
gripper, place back
into storage.
None
Storage may be full,
or IE magazine types
may be incorrect.
None
SERVICE MODE
Cannot go online
None
Replace Terminator
22 June 2004
BAD MEDIA
Cannot get type.
Please label media.
Cell %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
Remove cartridge
from cell.
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
CELL IS OBSTRUCTED
Please check to see
if cell is empty.
Cell %X (%Y %Z %A)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
CELL IS EMPTY
Please check to see
if cell is full.
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
LBI2 COMM FAILED

Please correct the
interface.
Box: %X
%X = frame number
7-25
Table 7-2
Message Lines
7-26
Error Messages
Variables
DRIVE COMM FAILED

Please verify drive
communication path.
Drive %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
DRIVE SCSI ID FAILED

Please verify drive
SCSI ID setting for
drive %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
drive number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
BUTTON PUSH FAILED

Please correct drive
push-button state.
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
TAPE PUSH FAILED

Please remove tape
from drive.
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
CLEAN TAPE MISSING

A previously defined
tape is missing:
volser %X
%X = volser number
CLEAN TAPE EXPIRED

Please remove the
cleaning tape number
%X volser %Y.
%X = tape number
%Y = volser number
WARNING!
The accessor could
not be parked.
[OK]
None
NO CLEANING TAPE
Please insert a
cleaning tape for
drive %X.
%X = index number
Locate dropped
cartridge, place
back into storage.
None
6-00054-02 Rev A
Table 7-2
Message Lines
22 June 2004
Variables
DRIVE CLEAN FAILED

A cleaning operation
failed to clean
None
POWER SUPPLY ERROR

Check AC connection
and 24V converter
number %X
%X = 24 Volt
Converter Number
POWER SUPPLY ERROR

Check AC connection
and 48V converter
number %X
%X = 48 Volt
Converter Number
POWER SUPPLY ERROR

Check AC box and AC
connection to
primary/second DC supplies
None
INVALID LABEL
Please check cart.
for valid label
%X %Y (%Z %A %B %C)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
%C
=
=
=
=
=
=
type ID
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
DRIVE INIT FAILED

Please correct drive
initialization for
drive %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
7-27
Error Log Codes

If an error occurs, record the error information from the Error
Log screen for future reference. Refer to Error Log Dialog on
page 5-28.
Table 7-3
Type
7-28
Error Messages
Error Log Reporting

Error
Modifier
Date Error
Occurred
6-00054-02 Rev A
Index
-Aabout screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148

access control
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
access control password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
accessor submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
addressing
element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
advanced dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69, 5-89, 5-146
area of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
associated documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
audio dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
autoclean
drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
immediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
library delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
-Bbarcode label
applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
barcode number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
book organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
-Ccartridge
accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-10
clean drives dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-108
cleaning drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
with cleaning tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
without cleaning tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
cleaning submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-93
command log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
config dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67
control
module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
-Ddatabase menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62

date dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-102
demo dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-143
description
barcode number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
cartridge accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
cartridge gripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
cartridge tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
element addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
element type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
horizontal axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
I/E station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
insert media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
main circuit breaker switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
navigation frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
network address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
operator intervention messages . . . . . . . 7-23
operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
push-buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
rmu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
vertical axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
DI/DO submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
diags submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
drive state dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
drives
autoclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
drives dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91, 5-93
drives submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30, 5-103
-Eeject clean tape dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

eject dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
eject media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
element
addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
element dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22, 5-64
emergency shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
emulate dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
error log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
expansion module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 4-7
-Ggeneral description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

gripper
cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
horizontal axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
vertical axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
gripper submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
-Hhazard alert messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
-Iimmediate autoclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

indicators
operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
in-2
Index
power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
initialize submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-111
insert clean tape dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
insert media
Insert/Eject station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
insert screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Insert/Eject Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Insert/Eject station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 6-6
Insert/Eject submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
inventory dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
-Llearn dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-69

library access
monitored doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
library delayed autoclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
library submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13, 5-72, 5-97
logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
drive error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
logs submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
-Mmain circuit breaker switch . . . . . . .3-6, 4-7, 4-10

main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
command log dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
commands menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Insert/Eject submenu . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
eject clean tape dialog . . . . . . . . .5-57
insert clean tape dialog . . . . . . . .5-47
insert/eject submenu
eject dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52
inventory dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
move submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36, 5-37
move media dialog . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
database menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62
advanced dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-69
learn dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-69
manipulate get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70
manipulate put . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70
config dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67
element dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-64
media dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-63
drive error log dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
error log dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
6-00054-02 Rev A
library submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

mode dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
advanced dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
demo dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
diags submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
accessor submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
move dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
DI/DO submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
locks dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
loopback dialog . . . . . . . . . 5-117
sensors
real time 5-120
wrap dialog 5-118
sensors submenu . . . . . . . . 5-118
gripper submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
get/put storage dialog . . . 5-122
step dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
powersup dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
scanner submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
adjust dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
fiducial test dialog . . . . . . . 5-132
trigger dialog . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
selftest dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
other dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
SAC dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
start dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
teach submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
teach current dialog . . . . . . . . . 5-140
teach new dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
cleaning submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
drives dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
media dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
view dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
drives dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
library submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72, 5-87
advanced dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
emulate dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
rmu submenu
IP dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
SCSI dialog
target ID dialog . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
SCSI submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
security dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
trace dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
library submenu
22 June 2004
element dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

logs submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
system dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
utils menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-97
drives submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-103
clean drives dialog . . . . . . . . . .5-108
initialize submenu . . . . . . . . . . .5-111
unload drives dialog . . . . . . . . .5-110
update microcode dialog . . . . .5-104
library submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-97
audio dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100
date dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-102
screen dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-98
time dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101
main menus
status menu
drives submenu . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30, 5-31
media info dialog . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
main power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-10
manipulate get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70
manipulate put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70
media dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-63, 5-94
media info dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
media mode
default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
media id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
menu
status menu
library submenu
scsi submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
utils menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-97
mode dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
mode select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
move submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
-Nnetwork address
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
-Ooperating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

operating state
not ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
operator intervention messages . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3, 4-3, 5-5
Index
in-3
help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
push-buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
other dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
-Ppark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
position to elem dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
power on indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
protective device
main circuit breaker switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
main power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
monitored access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
push-buttons
operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
-RRegulatory Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Remote Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
remove library media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
remove media
I/E station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
restarting the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
rmu
accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
checking general information . . . . . . . . . 4-14
checking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
configuring date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
configuring network parameters . . . . . . 4-15
configuring SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
configuring users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
error log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
logging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
NTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
SNMP MIB file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
support log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
supported browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
updating RMU firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
using the operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
viewing diagnostic files (logs) . . . . . . . . 4-20
rmu submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
-SSAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
SAC dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-143
SACs
complete list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
resolution actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
SAN Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Scalar DLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
scanner submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-130
screen dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-98
SCSI Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
SCSI submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13, 5-73
security dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-79
selftest dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-136
Service Action Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-113
setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-71
Shutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
shutting down the library
emergency shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
normal shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
start dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-114
starting the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11, 5-12
storage
cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Storage Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
symbols and notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
system dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
-Ttape cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

tape cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
tape drives
supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
teach submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-138
time dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101
trace dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-78
-Uunload drives dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-110

update microcode dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-104
utils menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-97
-Vview dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-96
in-4
Index
6-00054-02 Rev A

Oms 1000 K Operator Guide

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationOms 1000 k Operator Guide

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oms 1000 K Operator Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Oms 1000 K Operator Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Scalar 1000 Library

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Copyright Notice (Europe)

Document number: 6-00054-02 Rev A

ADIC Germany Beteiligungs GmbH, KG

Printed in the USA

ADIC CORPORATE 11431 WILLOWS ROAD, NE REDMOND, WASHINGTON, USA 1-800-336-1233

By Coordinate Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113

Using the Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Control Module and Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Cartridge Accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Indirect Fibre Channel Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Direct SCSI Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Network Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Main Circuit Breaker Switch Locations (Back View of CM/EM). . . 4-7

Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Reboot Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Operator Panel Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Mode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Ready Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Not Ready Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Shutdown Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Mode Parms Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Element Address Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Mixed-Media Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Parity Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

LCD Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Reservation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

System Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Element Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Logs Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Command Log Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Drive Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Drive State Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Element Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32